1999 infiniti i30 owner's manual

281
FOREWORD Your INFINITI represents a new way of thinking about vehicle design. It integrates advanced engi- neering and superior craftsmanship with a simple, refined aesthetic sensitivity associated with tradi- tional Japanese culture. The result is a different notion of luxury and beauty. The car itself is important, but so also is the sense of harmony that the vehicle evokes in its driver, and the sense of satisfaction you feel with the INFINITI —from the way it looks and drives to the high level of dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of the features, controls and performance characteristics of your INFINITI; it also provides important instructions and safety information. A separate Warranty Information Booklet is to be found in your Owner’s literature port- folio. Always carry it with you when you take your INFINITI to an authorized dealer. The portfolio contents provide complete infor- mation about all warranties covering this vehicle, the periodic maintenance required to keep the warranties in effect as well as the INFINITI Roadside Assistance program. Additionally, a separate Customer Care and Lemon Law Information Booklet will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your state’s lemon law. INFINITI is dedicated to providing a satisfying ownership experience for as long as you own your car. Should you have any questions regarding your INFINITI or your INFINITI dealer, please contact our Consumer Affairs department at 1-800-662-6200. In Hawaii 1-808-836-0848 (Oahu number). In Canada 1-800-363-4520. Thank you. READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY Before driving your vehicle please read your Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance re- quirements, assisting you in the safe opera- tion of your vehicle. WARNING IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY! Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfort- able trip for you and your passen- gers! O Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. O Always observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions. O Always use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint sys- tems. Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat. O Always provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety

Upload: frankie-e-woo

Post on 26-Oct-2014

447 views

Category:

Documents


3 download

DESCRIPTION

1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

FOREWORD

Your INFINITI represents a new way of thinkingabout vehicle design. It integrates advanced engi-neering and superior craftsmanship with a simple,refined aesthetic sensitivity associated with tradi-tional Japanese culture.

The result is a different notion of luxury and beauty.The car itself is important, but so also is the senseof harmony that the vehicle evokes in its driver, andthe sense of satisfaction you feel with the INFINITI—from the way it looks and drives to the high levelof dealer service.

To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to thefullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’sManual immediately. It explains all of the features,controls and performance characteristics of yourINFINITI; it also provides important instructions andsafety information.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet isto be found in your Owner’s literature port-folio. Always carry it with you when you takeyour INFINITI to an authorized dealer. Theportfolio contents provide complete infor-mation about all warranties covering thisvehicle, the periodic maintenance requiredto keep the warranties in effect as well asthe INFINITI Roadside Assistance program.

Additionally, a separate Customer Care andLemon Law Information Booklet will explainhow to resolve any concerns you may havewith your vehicle, as well as clarify yourrights under your state’s lemon law.

INFINITI is dedicated to providing a satisfyingownership experience for as long as you own yourcar. Should you have any questions regarding yourINFINITI or your INFINITI dealer, please contact ourConsumer Affairs department at 1-800-662-6200.In Hawaii 1-808-836-0848 (Oahu number). InCanada 1-800-363-4520. Thank you.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVESAFELYBefore driving your vehicle please read yourOwner’s Manual carefully. This will ensurefamiliarity with controls and maintenance re-quirements, assisting you in the safe opera-tion of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETYINFORMATIONREMINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rulesto help ensure a safe and comfort-able trip for you and your passen-gers!

O Never drive under the influence ofalcohol or drugs.

O Always observe posted speedlimits and never drive too fast forconditions.

O Always use your seat belts andappropriate child restraint sys-tems. Preteen children should beseated in the rear seat.

O Always provide information aboutthe proper use of vehicle safety

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 2: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

features to all occupants of thevehicle.

O Always review this Owner’sManual for important safety infor-mation.

MODIFICATION OF YOURVEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.Modification could affect its perfor-mance, safety or durability, and mayeven violate governmental regula-tions. In addition, damage or perfor-mance problems resulting frommodification may not be coveredunder INFINITI warranties.

WHEN READING THEMANUALThis manual includes information for

all options available on this model.Therefore, you may find some informa-tion that does not apply to your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustra-tions in this manual are those in effect at thetime of printing. INFINITI reserves the right tochange specifications or design at any timewithout notice.

IMPORTANT INFORMATIONABOUT THIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual.They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presenceof a hazard that could cause death orserious personal injury. To avoid orreduce the risk, the procedures mustbe followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presenceof a hazard that could cause minor ormoderate personal injury or damageto your vehicle. To avoid or reducethe risk, the procedures must befollowed carefully.

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 3: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

If you see this symbol, it means Do not dothis or Do not let this happen.

© 1998 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.TOKYO, JAPAN

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s Manual may bereproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmittedin any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical,photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the priorwritten permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

SII0151

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 4: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS ................... 1-1

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS .......................................................... 2-1

PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS............................................ 3-1

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS .................................. 4-1

STARTING AND DRIVING................................................................... 5-1

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................. 6-1

APPEARANCE AND CARE................................................................... 7-1

DO-IT-YOURSELF ............................................................................ 8-1

MAINTENANCE ............................................................................... 9-1

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION ......................................... 10-1

INDEX ........................................................................................ 11-1

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 5: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 6: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

1 SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

Seats............................................................ 1-2Front power seat adjustment ...................... 1-3Head restraint adjustment ........................... 1-4Armrest........................................................ 1-5Supplemental restraint system.................... 1-6Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem ......................................................... 1-6Supplemental air bag warning labels ........ 1-19Supplemental air bag warning light .......... 1-19Seat belts................................................... 1-21Precautions on seat belt usage................. 1-21Child safety................................................ 1-25

Pregnant women ....................................... 1-26Injured persons ......................................... 1-26Three-point type seat belt with retractor .. 1-27Seat belt extenders.................................... 1-30Seat belt maintenance ............................... 1-31Child restraints .......................................... 1-31Precautions on child restraints ................. 1-31Installation on rear seat outboard or centerposition...................................................... 1-33Top strap child restraint............................ 1-39Installation on front passenger seat.......... 1-41

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 7: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

SEATS

WARNING

O Do not ride in a moving vehiclewhen the seatback is reclined.This can be dangerous. The

shoulder belt will not be againstyour body. In an accident youcould be thrown into it and re-ceive neck or other serious inju-

ries. You could also slide underthe lap belt and receive seriousinternal injuries.

O For most effective protectionwhen the vehicle is in motion, theseat should be upright. Always sitwell back in the seat and adjustthe seat belt properly. See ‘‘Pre-cautions on seat belt usage’’ laterin this section.

SIR0091

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-2

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 8: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUST-MENT

WARNING

O Do not adjust the driver’s seatwhile driving in order that fullattention may be given to thedriving operations.

O Do not leave children unattendedinside the vehicle. They couldunknowingly activate switches orcontrols. Unattended childrencould become involved in seriousaccidents.

Operating tips

O The motor has an auto-reset overloadprotection circuit. If the motor stops duringoperation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivatethe switch.

O Do not operate the power support seat fora long period of time when the engine isoff. This will discharge the battery.

Forward and backwardMoving the switch forward or backward willslide the seat forward or backward to thedesired position.

RecliningMove the recline switch backward until thedesired angle is obtained. To bring the seat-back forward again, move the switch forwardand move your body forward. The seatbackwill move forward.

SIP0178

SIP0179

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-3

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 9: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Seat lifter (Driver’s seat)

Push the front or rear end of the switch toadjust the angle and height of the seatcushion.

Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides lowerback support to the driver. Move the lever upor down to adjust the seat lumbar area.

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUST-MENT

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted

properly as they may provide signifi-cant protection against injury in anaccident. Do not remove them.Check the adjustment after someoneelse uses the seat.

SIP0066 SIP0117

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-4

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 10: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

To raise the head restraint, simply pull it up.To lower, push the lock knob and push thehead restraint down.

To adjust the head restraint forward andbackward, push it in the direction required.

Adjust the head restraints so the top is levelwith the tops of your ears.

ARMREST

Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.

SIR0076

SIR0067

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-5

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 11: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLE-MENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)section contains important information con-cerning the driver and passenger supplemen-tal air bags and supplemental side air bagsand pre-tensioner seat belt.Supplemental air bag system: This sys-tem can help cushion the impact force to theface and chest of the driver and front passen-ger in certain frontal collisions.Supplemental side air bag system: Thissystem can help cushion the impact force tothe chest area of the driver and front passen-ger in certain side impact collisions. Thesupplemental side air bag is designed toinflate on the side where the vehicle isimpacted.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-

signed to supplement the crash protectionprovided by the driver and front passengerseat belts and are not a substitute for them.Seat belts should always be correctly wornand the driver and front passenger seated asuitable distance away from the steeringwheel, instrument panel and front door finish-ers. (See ‘‘Seat belts’’ later in this section forinstructions and precautions on seat beltusage.)

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turnoff after about 7 seconds if the systemis operational.

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-6

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 12: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

WARNING

O The supplemental air bags ordi-narily will not inflate in the eventof a side impact, rear impact, roll

over, or lower severity frontal col-lision. Always wear your seatbelts to help reduce the risk orseverity of injury in various kindsof accidents.

SIR0092

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-7

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 13: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

O The seat belts and the supple-mental air bags are most effec-tive when you are sitting wellback and upright in the seat.Supplemental air bags inflate

with great force. If you are unre-strained, leaning forward, sittingsideways or out of position in anyway, you are at greater risk ofinjury or death in a crash and may

also receive serious or fatal inju-ries from the supplemental airbag if you are up against it whenit inflates. Always sit backagainst the seatback and use theseat belts.

O Keep hands on the outside of thesteering wheel. Placing them in-side the steering wheel rim couldincrease the risk that they areinjured when the supplementalair bag inflates.

SIR0093

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-8

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 14: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

SIR0006 SIR0007 SIR0008

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-9

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 15: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

SIR0009 SIR0010 SIR0011

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-10

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 16: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

WARNING

O Never let children ride unre-strained or extend their hands orface out of the window. Do notattempt to hold them in your lapor arms. Some examples of dan-gerous riding positions are shownin the previous illustrations.

O Children may be severely injuredor killed when the supplementalair bag or supplemental side airbag inflates if they are not prop-erly restrained.

O Also never install a rear facingchild restraint in the front seat.An inflating supplemental air bagcould seriously injure or kill your

child. For additional information,see ‘‘Child restraints’’ later inthis section.

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-11

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 17: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

WARNING

O The supplemental side air bagordinarily will not inflate in theevent of a frontal impact, rear

impact or lower severity side col-lision. Always wear your seatbelts to help reduce the risk orseverity of injury in various kindsof accidents.

O The seat belts and the supple-mental side air bag are mosteffective when you are sittingwell back and upright in the seat.Supplemental side air bag in-flates with great force. Do notallow anyone to place their hand,leg or face near the supplementalside air bag on the side of theseatback of the front seat. Do notallow anyone sitting in the frontseat to extend their hand out ofthe window or lean against thedoor.

When sitting in the rear seat, donot hold onto the seatback of thefront seat. If the supplementalside air bag inflates, the occupantmay be seriously injured. Be es-pecially careful with children,

SIR0059 SIR0068

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-12

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 18: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

who should always be properlyrestrained.

O Do not use seat covers on thefront seatbacks. They may inter-fere with supplemental side airbag inflation.

Supplemental air bag system

The driver supplemental air bag is located inthe center of the steering wheel; the frontpassenger supplemental air bag is mounted inthe dashboard above the glove box. Thesupplemental air bags are designed to inflatein higher severity frontal collisions, although

they may inflate if the forces in another type ofcollision are similar to those of a higherseverity frontal impact. They may not inflate incertain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (orlack of it) is not always an indication of propersupplemental air bag operation.

When the supplemental air bag inflates, afairly loud noise may be heard, followed by

SIP0201

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-13

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 19: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

release of smoke. This smoke is not harmfuland does not indicate a fire, but care shouldbe taken not to inhale it, as it may causeirritation and choking. Those with a history ofa breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Supplemental air bags along with the use ofseat belts, help to cushion the impact force onthe face and chest of the front occupants. Theycan help save lives and reduce serious inju-ries. However, an inflating supplemental airbag may cause facial abrasions or otherinjuries. Supplemental air bags and supple-mental side air bags do not provide restraintto the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn andthe driver and passenger seated upright as faras practical away from the steering wheel ordash board. Since the supplemental air bagsinflate quickly in order to help protect the frontoccupants, the force of the supplemental airbag inflating can increase the risk of injury ifthe occupant is too close to or is against thesupplemental air bag module during inflation.The supplemental air bag will deflate quickly

after the collision is over.

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turnoff after about 7 seconds if the systemis operational.

WARNING

O Do not place any objects on thesteering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do notplace any objects between anyoccupant and the steering wheelor instrument panel. Such objectsmay become dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury if thesupplemental air bag inflates.

O Right after inflation, severalsupplemental air bag system

components will be hot. Do nottouch them; you may severelyburn yourself.

O No unauthorized changes shouldbe made to any components orwiring of the supplemental airbag system. This is to preventaccidental inflation of the supple-mental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

O Do not make unauthorizedchanges to your vehicle’s electri-cal system, suspension system orfront end structure. This couldaffect proper operation of thesupplemental air bag system.

O Tampering with the supplementalair bag system may result in se-rious personal injury. Tampering

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-14

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 20: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

includes changes to the steeringwheel and the instrument panelassembly by placing materialover the steering wheel pad andabove the dashboard, or by in-stalling additional trim materialaround the supplemental air bagsystem.

O Work around and on the supple-mental air bag system should bedone by an authorized INFINITIdealer. Installation of electricalequipment should also be doneby an authorized INFINITI dealer.The SRS wiring harnesses*should not be modified or discon-nected. Unauthorized electricaltest equipment and probing de-vices should not be used on thesupplemental air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harnesses arecovered with yellow insulation ei-ther just before the harness con-nectors or over the complete har-ness for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the supplemental airbag system and guide the buyer to theappropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Supplemental side air bag system

The supplemental side air bags are located inthe outside of the seatback of the front seats.The supplemental side air bag (on the driveror front passenger seat) is designed to inflatein higher severity side collisions, although itmay inflate if the forces in another type ofcollision are similar to those of a higherseverity side impact. It is designed to inflateon the side where the vehicle is impacted. Itmay not inflate in certain side collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper supplemental side air bagoperation.

When the supplemental side air bag inflates, afairly loud noise may be heard, followed byrelease of smoke. This smoke is not harmfuland does not indicate a fire, but care shouldbe taken not to inhale it, as it may causeirritation and choking. Those with a history ofa breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Supplemental side air bags along with the useof seat belts, help to cushion the impact forceon the chest of the front occupants. They canhelp save lives and reduce serious injuries.However, an inflating supplemental side airbag may cause abrasions or other injuries.

The seat belts should be correctly worn andthe driver and passenger seated upright as faras practical away from supplemental side airbag. Since the supplemental side air bagsinflate quickly in order to help protect the frontoccupants, the force of the supplemental sideair bag inflating can increase the risk of injury

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-15

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 21: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

if the occupant is too close to or is against thesupplemental side air bag module duringinflation. The supplemental side air bag willdeflate quickly after the collision is over.

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turnoff after about 7 seconds if the systemis operational.

WARNING

O Do not place any objects near theseatback of the front seats. Also,do not place any objects (an um-brella, bag, etc.) between thefront door finisher and the frontseat. Such objects may becomedangerous projectiles and causeinjury if the supplemental side airbag inflates.

O Right after inflation, severalsupplemental side air bag systemcomponents will be hot. Do nottouch them; you may severelyburn yourself.

O No unauthorized changes shouldbe made to any components orwiring of the supplemental sideair bag system. This is to preventaccidental inflation of the supple-mental side air bag or damage tothe supplemental side air bagsystem.

O Do not make unauthorizedchanges to your vehicle’s electri-cal system, suspension system orside panel. This could affectproper operation of the supple-mental side air bag system.

O Tampering with the supplementalside air bag system may result inserious personal injury. Tamper-ing includes changes to the frontseats assembly by placing mate-rial near the seatback of the frontseat, or by installing additionaltrim material around the supple-mental side air bag system.

O Work around and on the supple-mental side air bag systemshould be done by an authorizedINFINITI dealer. Installation ofelectrical equipment should alsobe done by an authorized INFINITIdealer.The SRS wiring harnesses*should not be modified or discon-nected. Unauthorized electricaltest equipment and probing de-

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-16

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 22: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

vices should not be used on thesupplemental side air bag sys-tem.

* The SRS wiring harnesses arecovered with yellow insulation ei-ther just before the harness con-nectors or over the complete har-ness for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the supplemental sideair bag system and guide the buyer to theappropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Pre-tensioner seat belt system(For front seats)

WARNING

O The pre-tensioner seat belt can-

not be reused after activation. Itmust be replaced together withthe retractor as a unit.

O If the vehicle becomes involved ina frontal collision but the pre-tensioner is not activated, be sureto have the pre-tensioner systemchecked and, if necessary, re-placed by your INFINITI dealer.

O No unauthorized changes shouldbe made to any components orwiring of the pre-tensioner seatbelt system. This is to preventaccidental activation of the pre-tensioner seat belt or damage tothe pre-tensioner seat belt opera-tion. Tampering with the pre-tensioner seat belt system mayresult in serious personal injury.

O Work around and on the pre-tensioner system should be doneby an authorized INFINITI dealer.Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by anauthorized INFINITI dealer. Unau-thorized electrical test equipmentand probing devices should notbe used on the pre-tensioner seatbelt system.

O If you need to dispose of thepre-tensioner or scrap the ve-hicle, contact an authorizedINFINITI dealer. Correct pre-tensioner disposal proceduresare set forth in the appropriateINFINITI Service Manual. Incor-rect disposal procedures couldcause personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-17

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 23: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

activates in conjunction with the supplementalair bag. Working with the seat belt retractor, ithelps tighten the seat belt the instant thevehicle becomes involved in certain types ofcollisions, thereby restraining seat occupants.

The pre-tensioner is encased with the seatbelt’s retractor. These seat belts are used thesame as conventional seat belts.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates,smoke is released and a loud noise may beheard. The smoke is not harmful, but careshould be taken not to inhale it as it maycause irritation and choking.

If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensionersystem, the seat belt warning light willflash intermittently after the ignition key isturned to the ON or START position. In thiscase, the pre-tensioner seat belt will notfunction properly.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat

belt system and guide the buyer to theappropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-18

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 24: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental air bagsystem are placed in the vehicle as shown inthe illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, dis-playing AIR BAG in the instrument panel,monitors the circuits of the supplemental airbag and supplemental side air bag systems.The circuits monitored by the supplemental airbag warning light are the diagnosis sensorunit, satellite sensors, supplemental air bagmodules, supplemental side air bag modulesand all related wiring.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

SIR0096

SIP0108

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-19

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 25: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

position, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental air bag and supplemental sideair bag systems needs servicing:

O The supplemental air bag warning lightdoes not come on and remain on for 7seconds and then go off as describedabove.

O The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently or remains on (after 7seconds).

O The supplemental air bag warning lightdoes not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the supplemental airbags or supplemental side air bags may notoperate properly. It must be checked andrepaired. Take your vehicle to the nearestauthorized INFINITI dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warninglight is on, it could mean that thesupplemental air bag or supplemen-tal side air bag system will notoperate in an accident.

Repair and replacement proce-dure

The supplemental air bags or supplementalside air bags are designed to inflate on aone-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless itis damaged, the supplemental air bag warninglight will remain illuminated after inflation hasoccurred. Repair and replacement of thesesupplemental systems should be done only byauthorized INFINITI dealers.

To ensure long-term functioning, thesesystems must be inspected 10 yearsafter the date of manufacture noted on

the certification label located on thedriver side center pillar.

When maintenance work is required on thevehicle, the supplemental air bags, supple-mental side air bags and related parts shouldbe pointed out to the person conducting themaintenance. The ignition key should alwaysbe in the LOCK position when working underthe hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

O Once the supplemental air bag orsupplemental side air bag hasinflated, the supplemental air bagmodule or supplemental side airbag module will not functionagain and must be replaced. Thesupplemental air bag module orsupplemental side air bag mod-ule should be replaced by anauthorized INFINITI dealer. The

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-20

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 26: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

supplemental air bag module orsupplemental side air bag mod-ule cannot be repaired.

O The supplemental air bag andsupplemental side air bag sys-tems should be inspected by anauthorized INFINITI dealer if thereis any damage to the front end orside portion of the vehicle.

O If you need to dispose of thesesupplemental systems or scrapthe vehicle, contact an authorizedINFINITI dealer.

Correct disposal procedures areset forth in the appropriateINFINITI Service Manual. Incor-rect disposal procedures couldcause personal injury.

SEAT BELTSPRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEYour chances of being injured or killed in anaccident and/or the severity of injury may begreatly reduced if you are wearing your seatbelt and it is properly adjusted. INFINITIstrongly encourages you and all of yourpassengers to buckle up every time you drive,even if your seating position includes asupplemental air bag.

Most states, provinces or territoriesrequire that seat belts be worn at alltimes when a vehicle is being driven.

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-21

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 27: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

SIR0102

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-22

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 28: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

SIR0104 SIR0016

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-23

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 29: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

WARNING

O Every person who drives or ridesin this vehicle should use a seatbelt at all times. Children shouldbe properly restrained and, if ap-propriate, in a child restraint.

O The belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to doso may reduce the effectivenessof the entire restraint system andincrease the chance or severity ofinjury in an accident. Serious in-jury or death can occur if the seatbelt is not worn properly.

O Always route the shoulder beltover your shoulder and acrossyour chest. Never run the beltbehind your back, under your arm

or across your neck. The beltshould be away from your faceand neck, but not falling off yourshoulder.

O Position the lap belt as low andsnug as possible around the hips,not the waist. A lap belt worn toohigh could increase the risk ofinternal injuries in an accident.

O Be sure the seat belt tongue issecurely fastened to the properbuckle.

O Do not wear the belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

O Do not allow more than one per-son to use the same belt.

SIR0014

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-24

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 30: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

O Never carry more people in thevehicle than there are seat belts.

O If the seat belt warning lightglows continuously while the ig-nition is turned ON with all doorsclosed and all seat belts fas-tened, it may indicate a malfunc-tion in the system. Have the sys-tem checked by your INFINITIdealer.

O Once the pre-tensioner seat belthas activated, it cannot be reusedand must be replaced togetherwith the retractor. See yourINFINITI dealer.

O Removal and installation of thepre-tensioner seat belt systemcomponents should be done by anauthorized INFINITI dealer.

O All seat belt assemblies includingretractors and attaching hardwareshould be inspected after any col-lision by your INFINITI dealer.INFINITI recommends that allseat belt assemblies in use dur-ing a collision be replaced unlessthe collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and con-tinue to operate properly. Seatbelt assemblies not in use duringa collision should also be in-spected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation isnoted.

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protectthem. They need to be properly re-strained.

The proper restraint depends on the child’ssize. Generally, infants [up to about 1 year andless than 20 lb (9 kg)] should be placed inrear facing child restraints. Front facing childrestraints are available for children who out-grow rear facing child restraints.

WARNING

Infants and children need specialprotection. The vehicle’s seat beltsmay not fit them properly. The shoul-der belt may come too close to theface or neck. The lap belt may not fitover their small hip bones. In anaccident, an improperly fitting seatbelt could cause serious or fatalinjury. Always use appropriate childrestraints.

All US states and provinces of Canada requirethe use of approved child restraints for infants

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-25

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 31: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

and small children. (See ‘‘Child restraints’’later in this section.)

In addition, there are many types of childrestraints available for larger children whichshould be used for maximum protection.

INFINITI recommends that all preteensand children be restrained in the rearseat if possible. According to accidentstatistics, children are safer when prop-erly restrained in the rear seat than inthe front seat. This is especially impor-tant because your vehicle has a supple-mental restraint system (air bag sys-tem) for the front passenger. (See‘‘Supplemental restraint system’’ ear-lier in this section for precautions.)

Infants and small childrenINFINITI recommends that infants and smallchildren be placed in child restraints thatcomply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. You should choose a child re-straint that fits your vehicle and always followthe manufacturer’s instructions for installationand use.

Larger childrenChildren who are too large for child restraintsshould be seated and restrained by the seatbelts which are provided.

If the child’s seating position has a shoulderbelt that fits close to the face or neck, the useof a booster seat (commercially available) mayhelp overcome this. The booster seat shouldraise the child so that the shoulder belt isproperly positioned across the top, middleportion of the shoulder and the lap belt is lowon the hips. The booster seat should fit thevehicle seat and have a label certifying that itcomplies with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. Once the child has grown so theshoulder belt is no longer on or near the faceand neck, use the shoulder belt without thebooster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel onany seat and do not allow a child inthe cargo areas while the vehicle ismoving. The child could be seriouslyinjured or killed in an accident.

PREGNANT WOMEN

INFINITI recommends that pregnant womenuse seat belts. Contact your doctor for specificrecommendations. The lap belt should beworn snug and positioned as low as possiblearound the hips, not the waist.

INJURED PERSONS

INFINITI recommends that injured personsuse seat belts, depending on the injury. Checkwith your doctor for specific recommenda-tions.

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-26

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 32: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

O Every person who drives or ridesin this vehicle should use a seatbelt at all times.

O Do not ride in a moving vehiclewhen the seatback is reclined.This can be dangerous. Theshoulder belt will not be againstyour body. In an accident youcould be thrown into it and re-ceive neck or other serious inju-ries. You could also slide underthe lap belt and receive seriousinternal injuries.

O For most effective protectionwhen the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sitwell back in the seat and adjustthe seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts1. Adjust the seat.

SIR0018

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-27

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 33: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractorand insert the tongue into the buckle untilit snaps.

The retractor is designed to lock duringa sudden stop or on impact. A slowpulling motion will permit the belt tomove, and allow you some freedom of

movement in the seat.

3. Position the lap belt portion low andsnug on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack.

The front passenger and rear seat belts have acinching mechanism for child restraint instal-

SIR0019

SIR0020

SIR0061

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-28

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 34: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

lation. It is referred to as the automatic lockingmode.

When the cinching mechanism is activated theseat belt cannot be withdrawn again until theseat belt tongue is detached from the buckleand fully retracted. For additional information,see ‘‘Child restraints’’ later in this section.

The automatic locking mode should beused only for child restraint installa-tion. During normal seat belt use by apassenger, the locking mode shouldnot be activated. If it is activated it maycause uncomfortable seat belt tension.

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the belt, press the button on thebuckle. The seat belt will automatically retract.

Checking seat belt operation

Your seat belt retractors are designed to lockbelt movement using two separate methods:

O when the belt is pulled quickly from theretractor.

O when the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the belts,check their operation as follows:

O grasp the shoulder belt and pull quicklyforward. The retractor should lock andrestrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this checkor if you have any questions about beltoperation, see your INFINITI dealer.

SIR0021

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-29

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 35: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Center of rear seat

Selecting correct set of seat belts:

The center seat belt buckle is identified by theCENTER mark. The center seat belt tongue canbe fastened only into the center seat beltbuckle.

Shoulder belt height adjustment(For front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should beadjusted to the position best for you. (See‘‘Precautions on seat belt usage’’ earlier in thissection.)

To adjust, squeeze the release buttons, andthen move the shoulder belt anchor to thedesired position, so that the belt passes overthe center of the shoulder. The belt should beaway from your face and neck, but not fallingoff of your shoulder. Release the adjustment

buttons to lock the shoulder belt anchor intoposition.

WARNING

O After adjustment, release the but-tons and try to move the shoulderbelt anchor up and down to makesure it is securely fixed in posi-tion.

O The shoulder belt anchor heightshould be adjusted to the positionbest for you. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of theentire restraint system and in-crease the chance or severity ofinjury in an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, itis not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder

SIR0077SIP0074A

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-30

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 36: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

belt and fasten it, an extender is availablewhich is compatible with the installed seatbelts. The extender adds approximately 8inches (200 mm) of length and may be usedfor either the driver or front passenger seatingposition. See your INFINITI dealer for assis-tance if the extender is required.

WARNING

O Only INFINITI belt extenders,made by the same companywhich made the original equip-ment belts, should be used withINFINITI belts.

O Persons who can use the standardseat belt should not use an ex-tender. Such unnecessary usecould result in serious personalinjury in the event of an accident.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCEO To clean the seat belt webbings,

apply a mild soap solution or any solutionrecommended for cleaning upholstery orcarpets. Then brush the webbing, wipe itwith a cloth and allow it to dry in theshade. Do not allow the seat belts to retractuntil they are completely dry.

O If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guideof the seat belt anchors, the seat belts mayretract slowly. Wipe the shoulder beltguide with a clean, dry cloth.

O Periodically check to see that theseat belt and the metal componentssuch as buckles, tongues, retractors, flex-ible wires and anchors work properly. Ifloose parts, deterioration, cuts or otherdamage on the webbing is found, theentire belt assembly should be replaced.

CHILD RESTRAINTS

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RE-STRAINTS

WARNING

O Infants and small children shouldalways be placed in an appropri-ate child restraint while riding inthe vehicle. Failure to use a childrestraint can result in serious in-jury or death.

O Infants and small children shouldnever be carried on your lap. It isnot possible for even the stron-gest adult to resist the forces of asevere accident. The child couldbe crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do notput the same seat belt aroundboth your child and yourself.

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-31

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 37: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

O Never install a rear facing childrestraint in the front seat. Aninflating supplemental air bagcould seriously injure or kill yourchild. A rear facing child restraintmust only be used in the rearseat.

O INFINITI recommends that thechild restraint be installed in therear seat. According to accidentstatistics, children are safer whenproperly restrained in the rearseat than in the front seat.

O An improperly installed child re-straint could lead to serious in-jury or death in an accident.

In general, child restraints are designed to beinstalled with the lap portion of a three-pointtype seat belt.

Child restraints for infants and children ofvarious sizes are offered by several manufac-turers. When selecting any child restraint,keep the following points in mind:O choose only a restraint with a label certi-

fying that it complies with Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213 or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

O check the child restraint in your vehicle tobe sure it is compatible with the vehicle’sseat and seat belt system. Choose a childrestraint that meets the guidelines of So-ciety of Automotive Engineers recom-mended practice J1819 for child restraintinstallation.

O if the child restraint is compatible withyour vehicle, place your child in the childrestraint and check the various adjust-ments to be sure the child restraint iscompatible with your child. Always followall recommended procedures.

All US states and provinces of Canada

require that infants and small childrenbe restrained in approved child re-straints at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

WARNING

O Improper use of a child restraintcan result in increased injuriesfor both the infant or child andother occupants in the vehicle.

O Follow all of the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructions forinstallation and use. When pur-chasing a child restraint, be sureto select one which will fit yourchild and vehicle. It may not bepossible to properly install sometypes of child restraints in yourvehicle.

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-32

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 38: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

O If the child restraint is not an-chored properly, the risk of achild being injured in a collisionor a sudden stop greatly in-creases.

O Adjustable seatbacks should bepositioned to fit the child re-straint, but as upright as pos-sible.

O After attaching the child restraint,test it before you place the childin it. Tilt it from side to side. Tryto tug it forward and check to seeif the belt holds the restraint inplace. If the restraint is not se-cure, tighten the belt as neces-sary, or put the restraint in an-other seat and test it again.

O For a front facing child restraint,

if the seat position where it isinstalled has a three-point typelap/shoulder belt, check to makesure the shoulder belt does not goin front of the child’s face or neck.If it does, put the shoulder beltbehind the child restraint. If youmust install a front facing childrestraint in the front seat, seelater in ‘‘Child restraints’’ for in-stallation on front passengerseat.

O When your child restraint is not inuse, store it in the trunk or keep itsecured with a seat belt to pre-vent it from being thrown aroundin case of a sudden stop or acci-dent.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint leftin a closed vehicle can become veryhot. Check the seating surface andbuckles before placing your child inthe child restraint.

INSTALLATION ON REAR SEATOUTBOARD OR CENTER POSI-TION

Front facing

WARNING

O The three-point belt on your ve-hicle is equipped with a lockingmode retractor which must beused when installing a child

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-33

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 39: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

restraint.

O Failure to do so will result in thechild restraint not being properlysecured. It could tip over or oth-erwise be unsecured and causeinjury to the child in a suddenstop or collision.

When you install a child restraint in a rearoutboard or center seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Thedirection of the child restraint depends onthe type of the child restraint and the sizeof the child. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

SIR0041A SIR0078

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-34

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 40: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

2. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into the buckleuntil you hear and feel the latch engage.Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of thebelt is fully extended. At this time, the beltretractor is in the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode). It reverts back toemergency locking mode when the belt isfully retracted.

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the beltto remove any slack in the belt.

SIR0043 SIR0039A SIR0062

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-35

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 41: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

5. Before placing the child in the childrestraint, use force to tilt the child restraintfrom side to side, and tug it forward tomake sure that it is securely held in place.

6. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull any

more belt webbing out of the retractor, thebelt is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use. If thebelt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through6.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt is allowed to wind back into theretractor, the automatic locking mode (childrestraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt onlylocks during a sudden stop or impact.

Rear facing

WARNING

O The three-point belt on your ve-hicle is equipped with a lockingmode retractor which must beused when installing a childrestraint.

O Failure to do so will result in thechild restraint not being properlysecured. It could tip over or oth-erwise be unsecured and causeinjury to the child in a suddenstop or collision.

When you install a child restraint in a rearoutboard or center seat, follow these steps:

SIR0042

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-36

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 42: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Thedirection of the child restraint depends onthe type of the child restraint and the sizeof the child. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into the buckleuntil you hear and feel the latch engage.Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

SIR0044A SIR0079 SIR0046

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-37

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 43: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of thebelt is fully extended. At this time, the beltretractor is in the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode). It reverts back toemergency locking mode when the belt isfully retracted.

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the beltto remove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the childrestraint, use force to tilt the child restraintfrom side to side, and tug it forward tomake sure that it is securely held in place.

6. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull any

SIR0045A SIR0047 SIR0048

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-38

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 44: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

more belt webbing out of the retractor, thebelt is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use. If thebelt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through6.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt is allowed to wind back into theretractor, the automatic locking mode (childrestraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt onlylocks during a sudden stop or impact.

TOP STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT

If your child restraint has a top strap, it mustbe secured to the provided anchor point.Anchor bracket hardware must be installed.The top strap anchor bracket is availablethrough your INFINITI dealer.

Part #88894-89900Secure the child restraint with the lap portionof three-point belt and latch the top strap hookonto the appropriate anchor bracket. To installthe anchor bracket, a metric bolt of thedimensions listed below must be used.

Bolt diameter: 8.0 mmBolt length: more than 1.18 in (30 mm)Thread pitch: 1.25 mm

Secure the top strap to the attaching boltwhich provides the straightest installation ofthe top strap.

WARNING

Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

SIR0080

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-39

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 45: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Anchor point locations

Anchor points are located under the rearparcel shelf finisher.

To use attaching hardware for child restraintswith top straps, follow these instructionscarefully:

1. Open the trunk and find the anchor pointnuts on the under side of the rear parcelshelf. Thread a bolt (8.0 mm diameter,1.25 mm pitch) up through the nut behindthe seating position where the child re-

straint will be installed and use it to breakthrough the rear parcel shelf support ma-terial. There are pre-cut circles at eachanchor point location that should breakaway from the shelf support material whenpressure is applied to them. Remove thebolt after you feel the pre-cut circle sepa-rate from the shelf support material.

2. Cut a small slit through the parcel shelffabric at the anchor point location. Reachthrough the fabric with a tool such as apair of needle-nose pliers and remove thepre-cut circle in the parcel shelf supportmaterial.

3. Install the bolt through the top strap hookand into the anchor point nut.

4. Be sure to follow all of the instructions thataccompany the top strap attaching hard-ware.

SIP0080

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-40

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 46: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

INSTALLATION ON FRONTPASSENGER SEAT

WARNING

O Never install a rear facing child

restraint in the front passengerseat. Supplemental air bags in-flate with great force. A rear fac-ing child restraint could be struck

by the supplemental air bag in acrash and could seriously injureor kill your child.

O INFINITI recommends that childrestraints be installed in the rearseat. However, if you must installa front facing child restraint in thefront passenger seat, move thepassenger seat to the rear-mostposition.

O A child restraint with a top strapshould not be used in the frontpassenger seat.

O The three-point belt in your ve-hicle is equipped with a lockingmode retractor which must beused when installing a childrestraint.

SIR0101

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-41

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 47: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

O Failure to use the retractor’s lock-ing mode may result in the childrestraint not being properly se-cured. The child restraint couldtip over or otherwise be unse-cured and cause injury to thechild in a sudden stop orcollision.

Front facing

If you must install a child restraint in the frontseat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the frontpassenger seat. It should be placed in afront facing direction only. Move the seatto the rearmost position. Always follow the

child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear facing direction andtherefore must not be used in the frontseat.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into the buckle

SIR0103

SIR0055

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-42

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 48: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

until you hear and feel the latch engage.Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of thebelt is fully extended. At this time, the beltretractor is in the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode). It reverts back to

emergency locking mode when the belt isfully retracted.

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the beltto remove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the childrestraint, use force to tilt the child restraintfrom side to side, and tug it forward tomake sure that it is securely held in place.

6. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull any

SIR0053A

SIR0056

SIR0063

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-43

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 49: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

more belt webbing out of the retractor, thebelt is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use. If thelap belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt is allowed to wind back into theretractor, the automatic locking mode (childrestraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt onlylocks during a sudden stop or impact.

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-44

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 50: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual
Page 51: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Instrument panel ......................................... 2-2Instrument panel (Traction Control System(TCS) equipped model) ............................... 2-3Meters and gauges...................................... 2-4Speedometer and odometer ........................ 2-5Tachometer.................................................. 2-5Engine coolant temperature gauge.............. 2-5Fuel gauge ................................................... 2-6Warning/indicator lights and chimes .......... 2-7Checking bulbs ............................................ 2-7Warning lights ............................................. 2-8Indicator lights .......................................... 2-11Chimes....................................................... 2-14Security system......................................... 2-14Theft warning ............................................ 2-14Infiniti Vehicle Immobiliser System .......... 2-16Windshield wiper and washer switch........ 2-17Rear window and outside mirror (if soequipped) defogger switch........................ 2-18Headlight and turn signal switch .............. 2-18Headlight switch ........................................ 2-18

Turn signal switch..................................... 2-20Cornering light........................................... 2-21Front fog light switch ................................ 2-21Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 2-21Horn........................................................... 2-22Heated seats (if so equipped) ................... 2-22Traction control system (TCS) cancel switch(if so equipped)......................................... 2-23Cigarette lighter and ashtray ..................... 2-24Storage ...................................................... 2-24Trays.......................................................... 2-24Cup holder................................................. 2-26Glove box .................................................. 2-27Console box............................................... 2-27Windows.................................................... 2-27Power windows ......................................... 2-27Sunroof (if so equipped)........................... 2-29Automatic sunroof..................................... 2-29Clock.......................................................... 2-30Adjusting the time ..................................... 2-30Interior light............................................... 2-30

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 52: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Ceiling........................................................ 2-30Personal light ............................................ 2-31Front .......................................................... 2-31Vanity mirror lights ................................... 2-31Trunk light ................................................. 2-31Integrated HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver (if so equipped) ..................... 2-31Programming HomeLinkT ........................ 2-32Canadian programming ............................. 2-33Operating the integrated HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver ................................ 2-33Programming problem diagnosis.............. 2-33Clearing the programmed information ...... 2-34Rolling code programming........................ 2-34Reprogramming a single HomeLinkTbutton ........................................................ 2-35If your vehicle is stolen............................. 2-35

Infiniti communicator (if so equipped) ..... 2-36Infiniti communicator purpose .................. 2-36Infiniti communicator outline .................... 2-36Safe operating recommendations.............. 2-37Quick summary ......................................... 2-37Functions ................................................... 2-38Function and description........................... 2-40Infiniti Communicator indicatordescription................................................. 2-43Operation of optional handset................... 2-45Payment for Infiniti Communicator use .... 2-45System limitations..................................... 2-45False activations and passwordselections................................................... 2-47Steering switch for cellular phone(Models with Infiniti Communicator) ........ 2-48Switch operations...................................... 2-48

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 53: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

INSTRUMENT PANEL

SII0188

See the page indicated in parentheses for operating details.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-2

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 54: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

INSTRUMENT PANEL (Traction Control System (TCS) equipped model)

SII0190

See the page indicated in parentheses for operating details.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-3

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 55: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

METERS AND GAUGES

0

F Hx1000r/min

CE 0

1

2

34 5

6

7

814020

8060

40120

200

160

12080

40

100

SII0159

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-4

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 56: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOM-ETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometerThe odometer/twin trip odometer are dis-played when the ignition key is in the ONposition.

The odometer records the total distance thevehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance ofindividual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the reset button changes the displayas follows:ODO → TRIP A → TRIP B → ODO

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the reset button for more than 1second resets the trip odometer to zero.

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed inrevolutions per minute (r/min).

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches thered zone, shift to a higher gear.Operating the engine in the red zonemay cause serious engine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA-TURE GAUGE

SII0160

SII0161 SII0033

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-5

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 57: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tem-perature.

The engine coolant temperature will vary withthe outside air temperature and driving con-ditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolanttemperature over the normal range,stop the vehicle as soon as safelypossible. If the engine is over-heated, continued operation of thevehicle may seriously damage theengine. See ‘‘If your vehicle over-heats’’ in the ‘‘6. In case of emer-gency’’ section.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel levelin the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,turning, acceleration, or going up or downhill.

The gauge needle is designed to remain inapproximately the same position, even whenthe ignition key is turned OFF.

Refill the fuel tank before the gaugeregisters Empty.

The low fuel warning light comes onwhen the fuel tank is getting low. Re-fuel as soon as it is convenient, prefer-ably before the gauge reaches E. Therewill be a small reserve of fuel in thetank when the fuel gauge needlereaches E.

CAUTION

If the vehicle is driven with the fuellevel very low, the malfunction indi-cator light may come on. Refuel assoon as possible. After driving for awhile, the light should remain off. Ifthe light remains on, have the ve-hicle inspected by an authorizedINFINITI dealer. For additional infor-mation, see the ‘‘Malfunction indi-cator light (MIL)’’ later in thissection.

SII0162

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-6

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 58: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND CHIMES

Engine oil pressure warning light or Anti-lock brake warninglight

Traction control system indicatorlight (if so equipped)

Charge warning light Low fuel warning light Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

Door open warning light Overdrive off indicator lightInfiniti Communicator redial indica-tor light (if so equipped)

Seat belt warning light Turn signal/hazard indicator lightInfiniti Communicator no serviceindicator light (if so equipped)

Supplemental air bag warning light High beam indicator light (Blue)Infiniti Communicator ‘‘Mayday’’emergency button indicator light (ifso equipped)

Low washer fluid warning light Cruise indicator lightInfiniti Communicator ‘‘Information’’button indicator light (if soequipped)

or Brake warning light Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

CHECKING BULBS

Apply the parking brake and turn the ignitionkey to ON without starting the engine. Thefollowing lights will come on:

, or , , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and thengo off:

or , , , ,, ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicate aburned-out bulb or an open circuit in the

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-7

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 59: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

electrical system. Have the system repairedpromptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

Engine oil pressure warn-ing light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. Ifthe light flickers or comes on during normaldriving, pull off the road in a safe area, stopthe engine immediately and call an INFINITIdealer or other authorized repair shop.

The oil pressure warning light is notdesigned to indicate a low oil level. Usethe dipstick to check the oil level. See‘‘Engine oil’’ in the ‘‘8. Do-it-yourself’’ section.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the oil pres-sure warning light on could cause

serious damage to the engine al-most immediately. Turn off the en-gine as soon as it is safe to do so.

Charge warning lightIf the light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate that there is some-thing wrong with the charging system. Turnthe engine off and check the alternator belt. Ifthe belt is loose, broken, missing or if thelight remains on, see your INFINITI dealerimmediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the belt isloose, broken or missing.

Door open warning lightThis light comes on when any of the doors arenot closed securely while the ignition key isON.

Seat belt warning lightand chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten seatbelts. The light illuminates whenever theignition key is turned to ON, and will remainilluminated until the driver’s seat belt isfastened. (When the ignition key is turned toON with the driver’s seat belt fastened, thelight will illuminate for about 7 seconds andthen go off.) At the same time, the chime willsound for about 6 seconds unless the driver’sseat belt is securely fastened.

See ‘‘Seat belts’’ in the ‘‘1. Seats, restraintsand supplemental air bag systems’’ section forprecautions on seat belt usage.

If the seat belt warning light blinks, there maybe something wrong with the pre-tensioner

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-8

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 60: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

seat belt. In this case, the pre-tensioner willnot operate properly. Have it checked by yourINFINITI dealer.

For additional information, see ‘‘Supplementalrestraint system’’ in the ‘‘1. Seats, restraintsand supplemental air bag systems’’ section.

Supplemental air bagwarning light

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight will illuminate. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the supplemental air bag andsupplemental side air bag systems are opera-tional.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental air bag and supplemental sideair bag need servicing and your vehicle mustbe taken to your nearest authorized INFINITIdealer.O The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on and remain on for 7seconds and then go off as describedabove.

O The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently or remains on (after 7seconds).

O The supplemental air bag warning lightdoes not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemen-tal restraint system may not function properly.For additional information, see ‘‘Supplementalrestraint system’’ in the ‘‘1. Seats, restraintsand supplemental air bag systems’’ section.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warninglight is on, it could mean that thesupplemental air bag or supplemen-tal side air bag system will notoperate in an accident.

Low washer fluid warninglight

This light comes on when the washer tankfluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid asnecessary. See ‘‘Window washer fluid’’ in the‘‘8. Do-it-yourself’’ section.

or Brake warninglight

This light functions for both the parking brakeand the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator:

When the ignition key is in the ON position,the light comes on when the parking brake isapplied.

Low brake fluid warning light:

The light warns of a low brake fluid level. If thelight comes on while the engine is runningwith the parking brake not applied, stop thevehicle and perform the following:

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-9

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 61: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluidas necessary. See ‘‘Brake and clutch fluid’’in the ‘‘8. Do-it-yourself’’ section.

WARNING

O Your brake system may not beworking properly if the warninglight is on. Driving could be dan-gerous. If you judge it to be safe,drive carefully to the nearest ser-vice station for repairs. Other-wise, have your vehicle towed.

O Pressing the brake pedal with theengine stopped and/or low brakefluid level may increase yourstopping distance and brakingwill require greater pedal effortas well as greater pedal travel.

O If the brake fluid level is below

the MIN mark on the brake fluidreservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checkedat an INFINITI dealer.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thewarning system checked by your INFINITIdealer.

or Anti-lock brakewarning light

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the anti-lock brake warning light willilluminate. The anti-lock brake warning lightwill turn off after about 2 seconds if thesystem is operational.

If the light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate there is somethingwrong with the anti-lock portion of the brakesystem. Have the system checked by yourINFINITI dealer. However if the light illumi-

nates while starting the engine, it does notindicate a system malfunction.

If an abnormality occurs in the system, theanti-lock function will cease but the ordinarybrakes will continue to operate normally.

If the light comes on while you aredriving, contact your INFINITI dealer forrepair.

Low fuel warning lightThis light comes on when the fuel in the tankis getting low. Refuel as soon as it isconvenient, preferably before the fuel gaugereaches E.

There will be a small reserve of fuelremaining in the tank when the fuelgauge needle reaches E.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-10

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 62: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Overdrive off indicatorlight

This light comes on during driving when theoverdrive switch is pressed to prevent over-drive operation.

The O/D OFF indicator light comes on for 2seconds each time the ignition key is turnedON. This shows the light is functioningproperly.

If the O/D OFF indicator light blinks for approxi-mately 8 seconds after coming on for 2 seconds,have your INFINITI dealer check the transmissionand repair it if necessary.

The automatic transmission is equipped withan electronic fail-safe mode. This systemallows the vehicle to be driven even in theevent of damage to the electrical circuits. Ifthis occurs, the gears automatically engageand lock into third gear.

See the ‘‘Driving the vehicle’’ in the ‘‘5.Starting and driving’’ section for fail-safebefore visiting your INFINITI dealer.

Turn signal/hazard indica-tor lights

The light flashes when the turn signal switchlever or hazard switch is turned on.

High beam indicator light(Blue)

This light comes on when the headlight highbeam is on and goes out when the low beamis selected.

Cruise indicator light

The light comes on while the vehicle speed iscontrolled by the cruise control system. If thelight flickers while the engine is running, itmay indicate there is something wrong withthe cruise control system. Have the systemchecked by your INFINITI dealer.

Malfunction indicator light(MIL)

If the malfunction indicator light comes onsteady or blinks while the engine is running,it may indicate a potential emission controlproblem.

The malfunction indicator light may also comeon steady or blink if the fuel filler cap has notbeen closed tightly or if the fuel tank is nearlyempty. Check to make sure the fuel cap issecure and that you have at least 3 US gallons(14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After driving for a while, the light shouldremain off if no other potential emissioncontrol system problem exists.

Operation

The malfunction indicator light will come onin one of two ways:

O Malfunction indicator light on steady —An emission control system malfunction

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-11

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 63: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

has been detected. Have the vehicle in-spected by an authorized INFINITI dealer.You do not need to have your vehicletowed to the dealer.

O Malfunction indicator light blinking — Anengine misfire has been detected whichmay damage the emission control system.To reduce or avoid emission control sys-tem damage:

a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH(72 km/h).

b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

c) Avoid steep uphill grades.

d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargobeing hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may stopblinking and come on steady.

Have the vehicle inspected by an authorizedINFINITI dealer. You do not need to have yourvehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation withouthaving the emission control systemchecked and repaired as necessarycould lead to poor driveability, re-duced fuel economy, and possibledamage to the emission control sys-tem.

Traction control systemindicator light (if soequipped)

The traction control system indicator lightshould come on when you turn the ignitionkey to ON. The light will go off as you start theengine. If the indicator light does not come onor go off, have the TCS checked by yourINFINITI dealer.

If the light stays on or comes on when you are

driving, there may be a problem with yourtraction control system and it may not operateproperly. Have the system checked by yourINFINITI dealer.

The traction control system indicator light maycome on for the following reasons.

a) If the system is turned off by pressingthe button on the instrument panel,the indicator light will come on andstay on. To turn the system back on,press the button again. The indicatorlight should go off.

b) If engine speed is above 4,000 rpm ina selected gear. Use D range on lowfriction road surfaces.

If the traction control system indicator lightcomes on and stays on for an extended periodof time when the system is turned on, haveyour vehicle checked by your INFINITI dealer.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-12

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 64: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Slip indicator light (if soequipped)

This light will blink on when your tractioncontrol system is limiting wheel spin. Slipperyroad conditions may exist if the slip indicatorlight blinks on. If this happens, adjust yourdriving accordingly.

You may feel or hear the system working, butthis is normal.

The light will blink on for a few seconds afterthe traction control system stops limitingwheel spin.

The slip indicator light also comes on whenyou turn the ignition key to ON. The light willgo off as you start the engine. If the light doesnot come on or go off, have the TCS checkedby your INFINITI dealer. The traction controlsystem operates in all transmission shift leverpositions. But the system can upshift thetransmission only as high as the indicatedshift lever position.

Infiniti Communicator re-dial indicator light (if soequipped)

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the redial indicator light will illumi-nate for up to 30 seconds and then turn off.This indicator light comes on when the initialconnection is not successful. Infiniti Commu-nicator is attempting to redial to contact theCommunicator Response Center. The redialindicator may blink before the button indicatorblinks. See ‘‘Infiniti Communicator’’ later inthis section.

Infiniti Communicator noservice indicator light (ifso equipped)

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the no service indicator light willilluminate for up to 30 seconds and then turnoff.

This indicator light comes on when the

cellular phone is outside of cellular phonetransmission range. Infiniti Communicator willnot be able to contact the CommunicatorResponse Center. See ‘‘Infiniti Communicator’’later in this section.

Infiniti Communicator‘‘Mayday’’ emergency but-ton indicator light (if soequipped)

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the ‘‘Mayday’’ emergency button in-dicator light will illuminate for up to 30seconds and then turn off if the system isoperational.

This button indicator light comes on when the‘‘Mayday’’ emergency button is pressed. Whenthe light is blinking, Infiniti Communicator istrying to acquire an available cellular channel.When the light is ON, the system is connectedto a cell and is communicating information tothe Communicator Response Center. See ‘‘In-

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-13

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 65: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

finiti Communicator’’ later in this section.

Infiniti Communicator‘‘Information’’ button indi-cator light (if so equipped)

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the ‘‘Information’’ button indicatorlight will illuminate for up to 30 seconds andthen turn off if the system is operational.

This button indicator light comes on when the‘‘Information’’ button is pressed. When thelight is blinking, Infiniti Communicator istrying to acquire an available cellular channel.When the light is ON, the system is connectedto a cell and is communicating information tothe Communicator Response Center. See ‘‘In-finiti Communicator’’ later in this section.

CHIMES

Key reminder chimeThe chime will sound if the driver side door isopened while the key is left in the ignition

switch (ignition switch is turned off). Removethe key and take it with you when leaving thevehicle.

Light reminder chimeA chime will sound when the driver side dooris opened if the light switch is in the or

position (ignition switch is turned off).

Turn the light switch off when you leave thevehicle.

Brake pad wear warningThe disc brake pads have audible wear warn-ings. When a brake pad requires replacement,it will make a high pitched scraping soundwhen the vehicle is in motion whether or notthe brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the warningsound is heard.

SECURITY SYSTEMYour vehicle has two types of security system,as follows:

O Theft warning

O Infiniti Vehicle Immobiliser System

The security condition will be shown by thesecurity indicator light.

THEFT WARNINGThe theft warning system provides visual andaudio alarm signals if parts of the vehicle aredisturbed.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-14

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 66: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Security indicator light

How to activate the theft warn-ing system

1. Close all windows.

The system can be activated even if thewindows are open.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close and lock all doors, hood and trunklid. Lock all doors by pressing the

button on the multi-remote control-

ler or with the key. At this time, the hazardindicators flash twice to indicate all doorsare locked.

4. Confirm that the SECURITY indicator lightcomes on. The SECURITY light glows forabout 30 seconds and then blink. Thesystem is now activated. If, during this 30second time period, the door is unlockedby the key or the multi-remote controller,or the ignition key is turned to ACC or ON,the system will not activate.

O If the key is turned slowly toward thefront of the vehicle when locking thedoor, the system may not activate. Ifthe key is returned beyond the verti-cal position toward the rear of thevehicle to remove the key, the sys-tem may be deactivated. If the indi-cator light fails to glow for 30 sec-onds, unlock the door once and lockit again.

O Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the systemwill activate with all doors, hood andtrunk lid locked and ignition key off.

Theft warning system operation

The warning system will give the followingalarm:

O the headlights blink and the horn soundsintermittently.

O the alarm automatically turns off after 2 to3 minutes. However, the alarm reactivatesif the vehicle is tampered with again. Thealarm can be shut off by unlocking a dooror trunk lid with the key, or by pressing the

button on the multi-remote control-ler.

The alarm is activated by:

O Opening the door or trunk lid withoutusing the key (even if the door is unlockedby releasing the door inside lock switch)

SII0035

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-15

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 67: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

or opening the trunk lid by operating theopener release button.

O Opening the hood.

O Pushing in or pulling out of the keycylinder on the door or trunk lid.

How to stop alarmThe alarm will stop only by unlocking a dooror trunk lid with the key, or by pressing the

button on the multi-remote controller.The alarm will not stop if the ignition switch isturned to ACC or ON.

If the system does not operate as de-scribed above, have it checked by yourINFINITI dealer.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBIL-ISER SYSTEMThe Infiniti Vehicle Immobiliser System willnot allow the engine to start without the use ofthe registered Infiniti Vehicle Immobiliser Sys-tem key.

If the engine fails to start using the registeredInfiniti Vehicle Immobiliser System key (forexample, when interference is caused byanother Infiniti Vehicle Immobiliser Systemkey, an automated toll road device or auto-mated payment device on the key ring), restartthe engine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF orLOCK position and wait approximately 5seconds.

3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered Infiniti VehicleImmobiliser System key.

If the no start condition still occurs, INFINITIrecommends placing the registered InfinitiVehicle Immobiliser System key on a separate

key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

Statement related to section 15 of FCCrules for Infiniti Vehicle ImmobiliserSystem(CONT UNIT-IMMOBILISER, ANT ASSY-IMMOBILISER)

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may causeundesired operation.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-16

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 68: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Security indicator light

This light blinks whenever the ignition switchis in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. Thisfunction indicates the security systemsequipped on the vehicle are operational.

If Infiniti Vehicle Immobiliser System is mal-functioning, this light will remain on while theignition key is in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or theengine will not start, see your INFINITIdealer for Infiniti Vehicle Immobiliser

System service as soon as possible.Please bring all Infiniti Vehicle Immo-biliser System keys that you have whenvisiting your INFINITI dealer for ser-vice.

WINDSHIELD WIPER ANDWASHER SWITCHThe windshield wiper and washer operateswhen the ignition key is in the ACC or ONposition.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper.

Intermittent operation can be adjusted from 3to 21 seconds by turning the knob.

Pull the lever toward you to operate thewasher. Then the wiper will also operateseveral times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washersolution may freeze on the wind-shield and obscure your vision whichmay lead to an accident. Warm thewindshield with the defroster beforeyou wash the windshield.

CAUTION

The following could damage thewasher system:

O Do not operate the washer con-

SII0035

SII0036

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-17

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 69: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

tinuously for more than 30 sec-onds.

O Do not operate the washer if thereservoir tank is empty.

REAR WINDOW AND OUT-SIDE MIRROR (if soequipped) DEFOGGERSWITCH

To defog/defrost the rear window glass and

outside mirrors, start the engine and push theswitch on. The indicator light will come on.Push the switch again to turn the defogger off.

It will automatically turn off in approximately15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of therear window, be careful not toscratch or damage the rear windowdefogger.

HEADLIGHT AND TURNSIGNAL SWITCH

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

Turn the switch to the AUTO position:

When the ignition key is in the ON or ACCposition, the tail light, headlight, instrumentlight and other lights turn on automatically,depending on the brightness of the surround-ings. When the ignition key is turned to theOFF position with the autolamp switch in the

SII0037

SII0079

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-18

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 70: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

maximum short position, the light will turn offautomatically.

When the light switch is turned to theposition, the headlight low or high

beam will turn off.

Turn the switch to the position:

The front clearance, side marker, tail, licenseplate and instrument lights will come on.

Turn the switch to the position:

Headlights will come on and all the otherlights remain on.

Be sure not to put anything on top of thephoto sensor located on the top left-hand side of the instrument panel. Thephoto sensor controls the autolamp; if itis covered, the photo sensor reacts as ifit is dark and the headlights will illumi-nate.

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control operateswhen the light switch is in the AUTO (ignitionkey is in the ON position), or

position.

Turn the control to adjust the brightness ofinstrument panel lights (except clock) andpower window switch lights.When the control is turned to the right until aclick sound is heard, the light intensity will beat maximum. When the control is turned to the

SII0082

SII0042

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-19

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 71: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

left until a click sound is heard, the light willbe turned off.

Headlight beam select

To select the high beam, push the leverforward. Pull it back to select the low beam.

Passing signalPulling the lever toward you will turn on theheadlight high beam.

Daytime running light system(Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at areduced intensity when the engine is startedwith the parking brake released. The daytimerunning lights operate with the headlightswitch in the OFF position or in the

position. Turn the headlight switch tothe position for full illumination whendriving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before theengine is started, the daytime running lightsdo not illuminate. The daytime running lightsilluminate once the parking brake is released.The daytime running lights will remain onuntil the ignition switch is turned off.

WARNING

When the daytime running light sys-

tem is active, tail lights on yourvehicle are not on. It is necessary atdusk to turn on your headlights.Failure to do so could cause anaccident injuring yourself andothers.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the

SII0080

SII0083

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-20

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 72: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

turning direction. When the turn is completed,the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever upor down to the point where lights beginflashing.

CORNERING LIGHT

The cornering light provides additional illu-mination toward the turning direction. Thelight will come on when the turn signal lever

is moved to the right or left with the headlightson.

FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlightswitch on, then turn the switch to the

position. To turn them off, turn theswitch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on for the fog lights tooperate.

HAZARD WARNINGFLASHER SWITCH

Push the switch on to warn other drivers whenyou must stop or park under emergencyconditions. All turn signal lights will flash.

Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving.

SII0041

SII0084

SII0044

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-21

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 73: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

WARNING

O When stalled or stopped on theroadway under emergency condi-tions, move the vehicle well offthe road.

O Do not use the switch while mov-ing on the highway unless un-usual circumstances force you todrive so slowly that your vehiclemight become a hazard to othertraffic.

O Turn signals do not work when theswitch is operating.

The flasher can be actuated with the ignitionswitch either off or on.

HORN

To sound the horn, push the center pad areaof the steering wheel.

HEATED SEATS (if soequipped)

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.The switches located on the center consolecan be operated independently of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Select heat range.

O For low heat, press the top of theswitch.

SII0168

SII0164

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-22

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 74: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

O For high heat, press the bottom of theswitch.

O For no heat, the switch has a centerOFF position between low and high.

The indicator light in the switch willilluminate when low or high is selected.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,automatically turning the heater on and off.The indicator light will remain on as longas the switch is on.

3. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, orbefore you leave the vehicle, be sure toturn the switch off.

CAUTION

O Do not use the seat heater forextended periods or when no oneis using the seat.

O Do not put anything on the seatwhich insulates heat, such as ablanket, cushion, seat cover, etc.Otherwise, the seat may becomeoverheated.

O Do not place anything hard orheavy on the seat or pierce it witha pin or similar object. This mayresult in damage to the heater.

O Any liquid spilled on the heatedseat should be removed immedi-ately with a dry cloth.

O When cleaning the seat, neveruse benzine, thinner, or any simi-lar materials.

O If any abnormalities are found orthe heated seat does not operate,turn the switch off and have thesystem checked by your INFINITI

dealer.

O The battery could run down if theseat heater is operated while theengine is not running.

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM(TCS) CANCEL SWITCH (if soequipped)

To cancel the Traction Control System (TCS),push the TCS cancel switch. The indicator

SII0191

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-23

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 75: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

will come on. Push it again to turn thesystem back on.

See ‘‘Traction control system’’ in the ‘‘5.Starting and driving’’ section.

CIGARETTE LIGHTER ANDASHTRAY

The cigarette lighter operates when the igni-tion switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Push the lighter in all the way. When thelighter is heated, it will spring out.

Return the lighter to its original position afteruse.

WARNING

The cigarette lighter should not beused while driving in order that fullattention may be given to the drivingoperation.

CAUTION

The cigarette lighter socket is apower source for the cigarettelighter element only. The use of thecigarette lighter socket as a powersource for any other accessory is notrecommended.

STORAGE

TRAYS

To open the storage tray, push and release.The storage tray will automatically move to theopen position.

WARNING

The storage tray should not be usedwhile driving in order that full atten-tion may be given to the driving

SII0165

SII0104

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-24

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 76: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

operation.

SII0169

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-25

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 77: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo to helpprevent it from sliding or shifting. Donot place cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause per-sonal injury.

Pull the armrest forward and lay it horizontal.Then release the lever (inset) and pull the trayforward (if so equipped). In this condition youare able to gain access to the trunk.

CUP HOLDER

WARNING

The cup holder should not be usedwhile driving in order that full atten-tion may be given to the drivingoperation.

CAUTION

O Avoid abrupt starting and brakingwhen the cup holder is being usedto prevent spilling the drink. If theliquid is hot, it can scald you oryour passenger.

O Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injureyou in an accident.

SII0166

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-26

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 78: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

GLOVE BOX

When locking or unlocking the glove box, usethe master key or wallet key.

The glove box may be opened by pulling thehandle.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed whiledriving to help prevent injury in anaccident or a sudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

Card holder

WARNING

The card holder should not be usedwhile driving in order that full atten-tion may be given to the drivingoperation.

WINDOWSPOWER WINDOWS

WARNING

O Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehiclebefore closing the windows. Usethe window lock switch to preventunexpected use of the power win-dows.

O Do not leave children unattendedinside the vehicle. They couldunknowingly activate switches orcontrols and become trapped in awindow. Unattended childrencould become involved in seriousaccidents.

SIP0230

SII0167

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-27

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 79: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

The power windows operate when the ignitionkey is in the ON position, or for about 45seconds after the ignition key is turned to theOFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’sdoor is opened during this period of about 45seconds, power to the windows is cancelled.

To open or close the window, push down orpull up the switch and hold it. The mainswitch (driver side switches) will open orclose all the windows.

The passenger side switch will open or closeonly the corresponding window. To open orclose the window, hold the switch down or up.

Locking passenger’s windowsWhen the lock button is pushed in, only thedriver side window can be opened or closed.Push it in again to cancel.

Automatic operation

To fully open the driver side window, com-pletely push down the switch and release it; itneed not be held. The window will automati-cally open all the way. To stop the window,just pull up the switch toward the close side.

A light press on the switch will cause thewindow to open until the switch is released.

SII0049 SII0050

SII0051

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-28

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 80: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

SUNROOF (if so equipped)AUTOMATIC SUNROOFThe sunroof operates when the ignition key isin the ON position, or for about 45 secondsafter the ignition key is turned to the OFFposition. If the driver’s, or passenger’s door isopened during this period of about 45 sec-onds, power to the sunroof is canceled.

Sliding the sunroof

To open the roof, press and hold the switch tothe side.

To close the roof, press and hold the switch tothe side.

Tilting the sunroofTo tilt up, first close the sunroof, then pressand hold the side of the tilt switch. Totilt down the sunroof, press and hold the

side.

Sun shadeOpen/close the sun shade by sliding itbackward/forward.

The shade will open automatically when thesunroof is opened. However, it must be closedmanually.

WARNING

O In an accident you could be

thrown from the vehicle throughan open sunroof. Always use seatbelts and child restraints.

O Do not allow anyone to stand upor extend any portion of theirbody out of the opening while thevehicle is in motion or while thesunroof is closing.

CAUTION

O Remove water drops, snow, iceor sand from the sunroof beforeopening.

O Do not place any heavy object onthe sunroof or surrounding area.

SII0052

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-29

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 81: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

If the sunroof does not closeHave your INFINITI dealer check and repair thesunroof.

CLOCKThe digital clock displays time when theignition key is in ACC or ON.

If the power supply is disconnected, the clockwill not indicate the correct time. Readjust thetime.

ADJUSTING THE TIME

Push the H button to adjust the hour.

Push the M button to adjust the minute.

INTERIOR LIGHT

CEILING

The light has a three-position switch.

When the switch is in the center j position,the light will illuminate when a door isopened.

The light will stay on for about 30 secondswhen:

O The key is removed from the ignitionswitch while the driver’s door is closed.

O The driver’s door is unlocked while the keyis removed from the ignition switch.

O The key is removed from the ignitionswitch and the driver’s door is opened andthen closed.

The timer is cancelled, and the light will turnoff when:

O The driver’s door is locked.

O The ignition switch is turned ON.

CAUTION

Leaving the light switch in the ONposition for extended periods of timewill result in a discharged battery.

SII0054A

IIC038M

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-30

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 82: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

PERSONAL LIGHTFRONT

VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS

The light on the vanity mirror will turn onwhen the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.

TRUNK LIGHTThe light illuminates when the trunk lid isopened. When the trunk lid is closed, the lightwill go off.

INTEGRATED HomeLinkTUNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (ifso equipped)The Integrated HomeLinkT Universal Trans-ceiver provides a convenient way to consoli-date the functions of up to three individualhand-held transmitters into one built-in de-vice.

Integrated HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver:

O Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)devices such as garage doors, gates, homeand office lighting, entry door locks andsecurity systems.

O Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. Noseparate batteries are required. If the vehi-cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-nected, HomeLinkT will retain all pro-gramming.

Once the Integrated HomeLinkT Univer-sal Transceiver is programmed, retain

IIC036-A

SII0055

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-31

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 83: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

the original transmitter for future pro-gramming procedures (i.e., new ve-hicle purchases). Upon sale of the ve-hicle, the programmed IntegratedHomeLinkT Universal Transceiver but-tons should be erased for security pur-poses. For additional information, referto ‘‘Clearing the programmed informa-tion’’ later in this section.

WARNING

O Do not use the IntegratedHomeLinkT Universal Transceiverwith any garage door opener thatlacks safety stop and reverse fea-tures as required by federalsafety standards. (These stan-dards became effective foropener models manufactured af-

ter April 1, 1982.) A garage dooropener which cannot detect anobject in the path of a closinggarage door and then automati-cally stop and reverse, does notmeet current federal safety stan-dards. Using a garage dooropener without these features in-creases the risk of serious injuryor death.

O During programming, your ga-rage door or gate may open orclose. Make sure that people andobjects are clear of the garagedoor or gate that you are pro-gramming.

O Your vehicle’s engine should beturned off while programming theIntegrated HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver.

PROGRAMMING HomeLinkT

1. With the ignition key in the OFF position,press and hold the two outside buttons,and release when the indicator light beginsto flash (approximately 20 seconds). Thisprocedure erases the factory set defaultcodes and does not have to be followedwhen programming additional hand-heldtransmitters.

2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter(from the device you wish to train) ap-proximately 2 to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm)

SIP0198

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-32

Z 98.10.30/’98 CA32-D X

Page 84: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

away from the surface of HomeLinkTkeeping the indicator light in view.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously pushthe hand-held transmitter button and thedesired HomeLinkT button. Do not releasethe buttons until step 4 has been com-pleted.

NOTE:

Some garage door openers may re-quire the procedures noted under‘‘Canadian Programming’’.

4. The HomeLinkT indicator light will flash,first slowly and then rapidly. When theindicator light flashes rapidly, both buttonsmay be released. The rapid flashing lightindicates the Integrated HomeLinkT Uni-versal Transceiver has been successfullyprogrammed.

To program the remaining two buttons, followsteps 2 through 4.

If, after repeated attempts, you do not suc-cessfully program the Integrated HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver to learn the signal of thehand-held transmitter, refer to ‘‘Rolling CodeProgramming’’ later in this section.

CANADIAN PROGRAMMING

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations requiredhand-held transmitters to stop transmittingafter 2 seconds. To program your hand-heldtransmitter to HomeLinkT, continue to pressand hold the HomeLinkT button (note steps 2through 4 under ‘‘Programming HomeLinkT’’)while you press and re-press (‘‘cycle’’) yourhand-held transmitter every 2 seconds untilthe indicator light flashes rapidly (indicatingsuccessful programming).

NOTE:

If programming a garage door opener,etc., it is advised to unplug the deviceduring the ‘‘cycling’’ process to preventpossible damage to the garage door

opener components.

OPERATING THE INTEGRATEDHomeLinkT UNIVERSAL TRANS-CEIVER

The Integrated HomeLinkT Universal Trans-ceiver (once programmed) may now be usedto activate the garage door, etc. To operate,simply press the appropriate programmedIntegrated HomeLinkT Universal Transceiverbutton. The red indicator light will illuminatewhile the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING PROBLEM-DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLinkT does not quickly learn thehand-held transmitter information:

O replace the hand-held transmitter batterieswith new batteries.

O position the hand-held transmitter with itsbattery area facing away from theHomeLinkT surface.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-33

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 85: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

O press and hold both the HomeLinkT andhand-held transmitter buttons without in-terruption.

O position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5inches (50 to 127 mm) away from theHomeLinkT surface. Hold the transmitterin that position for up to 15 seconds. IfHomeLinkT is not programmed within thattime, try holding the transmitter in anotherposition - keeping the indicator light inview at all times.

If you continue to have programming difficul-ties, please contact the INFINITI ConsumerAffairs Department. The phone numbers arelocated in the Foreword of this owner’smanual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATIONIndividual buttons cannot be cleared, howeverto clear all programming, press and hold thetwo outside buttons and release when the

indicator light begins to flash (approximately20 seconds).

ROLLING CODE PROGRAM-MING

Rolling code garage door openers (or otherrolling code devices) which are ‘‘code pro-tected’’ and manufactured after 1996, may bedetermined by the following.

A. Reference the garage door opener Owner’sManual for verification.

B. The hand-held transmitter appears to pro-gram the Integrated HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver but does not activate the ga-rage door.

C. Press and hold the trained HomeLinkTbutton. If the garage door opener has therolling code feature, the HomeLinkT indi-cator light will flash rapidly, then remainson after 2 seconds.

To program the Integrated HomeLinkT Uni-

versal Transceiver to a garage door openerwith the rolling code feature, follow theseinstructions after completing the ‘‘Program-ming HomeLinkT’’ procedures earlier in thissection. The aid of a second person may makethe following procedures quicker and easier.

1. Locate the training button on the garagedoor opener motor unit. Exact location andcolor of the button may vary by garagedoor opener brand. If there is difficultylocating the training button, reference thegarage door opener owner’s manual.

2. Press the training button on the garagedoor opener motor unit (which may acti-vate a training light).

NOTE:

Following step 2, there are 30 sec-onds in which to initiate step 3.

3. Firmly press and release the programmedHomeLinkT button. Press and release theHomeLinkT button a second time to com-

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-34

Z 98.10.30/’98 CA32-D X

Page 86: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

plete the training process. (Some garagedoor openers may require you to do thisprocedure a third time to complete thetraining.)

The garage door opener should now recognizethe Integrated HomeLinkT Universal Trans-ceiver and activate when the HomeLinkTbutton is pressed. The remaining two buttonsmay now be programmed (if not yet pro-grammed, follow steps 2 through 4 in the‘‘Programming HomeLinkT’’ procedures ear-lier in this section).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHomeLinkT BUTTONTo reprogram an Integrated HomeLinkT Uni-versal Transceiver button, complete the fol-lowing.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkTbutton. Do not release the button untilstep 4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash

slowly (after 20 seconds), position thehand-held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50 to127 mm) away from the HomeLinkT sur-face.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitterbutton.

4. The HomeLinkT indicator light will flash,first slowly and then rapidly. When theindicator light begins to flash rapidly,release both buttons.

The Integrated HomeLinkT Universal Trans-ceiver button has now been reprogrammed.The new device can be activated by pushingthe HomeLinkT button that was just pro-grammed. This procedure will not affect anyother programmed HomeLinkT buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLENIf your vehicle is stolen, you should changethe codes of any non-rolling code device thathas been programmed into HomeLinkT. Con-sult the Owner’s Manual of each device or call

the manufacturer or dealer of those devices foradditional information.

When your vehicle is recovered, youwill need to reprogram the IntegratedHomeLinkT Universal Transceiver withyour new transmitter information.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rulespart 15. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This de-vice may not cause harmful interfer-ence and (2) This device must acceptany interference that may be received,including interference that may causeundesired operation.

The transmitter has been tested andcomplies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s au-thority to operate the device.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-35

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 87: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D.: CB2V67690

INFINITI COMMUNICATOR(if so equipped)

CAUTION

It is important that you fully under-stand the limitations of the InfinitiCommunicator system prior to use.

There are limitations to the Infiniti Communi-cator system. Please make sure you under-stand the limitations before using InfinitiCommunicator. See ‘‘System limitations’’ laterin this section.

INFINITI COMMUNICATORPURPOSE

The purpose of Infiniti Communicator is toprovide you with increased security by givingyou a convenient way of contacting the mostappropriate emergency assistance providerduring an emergency. You will have a choiceof functions depending on the service contractyou choose.

INFINITI COMMUNICATOROUTLINE

This system uses the Global PositioningSystem (GPS), cellular phone technology andthe Communicator Response Center to pro-vide the following functions:

O One touch ‘‘Mayday’’ emergency dialing

O One touch ‘‘Information’’ dialing

SII0232

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-36

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 88: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

O Automatic supplemental air bag inflationnotification

O Remote door unlock

O Stolen vehicle tracking

O Alarm notification

SAFE OPERATING RECOMMEN-DATIONS

WARNING

O The Infiniti Communicator systemshould not be used while drivingin order that full attention may begiven to driving.

O The cellular phone handsetshould not be used while drivingin order that full attention may begiven to driving.

O If you must make a call while your

vehicle is in motion, the hands-free cellular phone operationalmode is highly recommended.Exercise extreme caution at all-times in order that full attentionmay be given to driving.

O If a conversation in a movingvehicle requires you to takenotes, pull off the road to a safelocation and stop your vehiclebefore doing so.

It is important that you read this Owner’sManual thoroughly to ensure the safe opera-tion of your Infiniti Communicator system.

O The safest calls are those made when thevehicle is stopped.

O Hands-free cellular phone operation ishighly recommended and is easily main-tained by keeping the cellular telephone

handset in the cradle.

QUICK SUMMARY

O ‘‘Mayday’’ emergency and‘‘Information’’ dialing can take place whenthe ignition key is in the ON position orabout 3 minutes after it is turned OFF.

O There will be a delay of at least 25 secondsfrom the time the ‘‘Mayday’’ emer-gency or ‘‘Information’’ button ispressed until a Communicator ResponseCenter operator answers the call. Duringthe delay, Infiniti Communicator is makingthe connection and transmitting vehicledata to the Communicator Response Cen-ter. If the cellular lines or landlines arebusy, the delay may be longer.

O Voice communication with the Communi-cator Response Center is all done througha hands-free microphone. Audio is heardthrough the right front door speaker. Toadjust the speaker volume, push the vol-

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-37

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 89: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

ume up/down switch in the steering switchfor the cellular phone.

O All indicators , , ,show the condition of the system

(transmitting, redialing, etc.). For detailssee ‘‘Infiniti Communicator indicator de-scription’’ later in this section.

O All indicators , , ,illuminate for up to 30 seconds

when the ignition switch is turned fromOFF to ON and the Infiniti Communicatorsystem performs a self check. However, noindicators will illuminate when the ignitionswitch is turned from ON to OFF to ON inless than 3 minutes because the systemremains available.

O If the ‘‘Mayday’’ emergency and‘‘Information’’ button indicators do

not turn off after the ignition switch isturned ON, or if both button indicatorsilluminate any time while the ignition

switch is ON except immediately after theignition switch is turned ON, the system isnot working correctly. You will need totake your car to your INFINITI dealer. TheInfiniti Communicator system may stilloperate in some cases.

O When Infiniti Communicator contacts theCommunicator Response Center, vehicledata, that includes the position of your car,is sent to the Response Center.

O You can choose an optional handset so theInfiniti Communicator system can be usedas a normal cellular phone.

FUNCTIONS

One touch ‘‘Mayday’’ emer-gency dialingIf an emergency occurs, press the‘‘Mayday’’ emergency button. The indicator inthe button blinks and then stays on, indicatingthe Communicator Response Center is beingcontacted. When Infiniti Communicator con-

nects with the Communicator Response Cen-ter, vehicle information, including the type ofcall (Mayday) and vehicle position, is trans-mitted to the Response Center. Voice commu-nication using the Infiniti Communicator sys-tem is not possible when data is beingtransmitted. After the data is transmitted, theCommunicator Response Center operator willcome on-line to speak with you. The Re-sponse Center operator will contact emer-gency crews and send them to your location,if you request them. If you do not answer theoperator, or if the operator hears somethingthat sounds like an emergency, emergencycrews will be informed. If no emergencyexists, the Response Center operator will askyou to give the prearranged password. A falsepassword will be interpreted as a duresssituation. This will prompt the operator todispatch emergency assistance. The operatorwill also appear to end the call, but willcovertly monitor your vehicle until assistancearrives.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-38

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 90: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

One touch ‘‘Information’’ dialingIf the vehicle becomes disabled because ofengine or other trouble, press the‘‘Information’’ button for roadside service. Theindicator in the button blinks and then stayson, indicating the Communicator ResponseCenter is being contacted. When Infiniti Com-municator connects with the CommunicatorResponse Center, vehicle information, includ-ing the type of call (Information) and vehicleposition, is transmitted to the Response Cen-ter. Voice communication using the system isnot possible when data is being transmitted.After the data is transmitted, the Communica-tor Response Center operator will come on-line to speak with you. This button may alsobe used to obtain more information about yourInfiniti Communicator system. You may alsouse the ‘‘Information’’ button to request ser-vices that may be added in the future.

Automatic supplemental air baginflation notification

When the supplemental air bag inflates, it isassumed that a collision has taken place.Infiniti Communicator contacts the Communi-cator Response Center, even if the

‘‘Mayday’’ emergency dialing button isnot pressed. The Communicator ResponseCenter notifies the appropriate local agencies.The Communicator Response Center will at-tempt to contact you. If contact is established,the Communicator Response Center will pro-vide the responding emergency crews withinformation about your condition. The Com-municator Response Center will stay in con-tact until the emergency crews arrive.

Remote door unlock

If you lock the keys in your car, you can callthe Communicator Response Center by tele-phone. Refer to your Infiniti CommunicatorCard for the Communicator Response Center

telephone number. The Infiniti Consumer Af-fairs department can also provide the tele-phone number for the Communicator Re-sponse Center. Keep this number where it willbe available when your vehicle is locked. Youare required to provide a prearranged pass-word to confirm your identity. Upon verifica-tion that you are the owner, the CommunicatorResponse Center will instruct you how to openthe door.

Stolen vehicle trackingIn some cases of theft, your car can be trackedby the Communicator Response Center. Thisfunction allows the verified owner of the car tocontact the Communicator Response Center toattempt to locate the stolen car. If you havenot done so, the Communicator ResponseCenter operator will help you file a stolenvehicle report with the appropriate policedepartment. A stolen vehicle report is oftenrequired before the authorities will dispatchpolice officers to the vehicle location. Call the

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-39

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 91: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Communicator Response Center by telephone.Refer to your Infiniti Communicator Card forthe Communicator Response Center telephonenumber. The Infiniti Consumer Affairs depart-ment can also provide the telephone numberfor the Communicator Response Center. Keepthis number where it will be available whenyour vehicle is stolen. In order to find thelocation of your stolen car, the ignition switchmust be in the ON position. If the Communi-cator Response Center successfully locatesyour vehicle, the operator has the ability tocovertly hear what is happening inside thevehicle. The Communicator Response Centeroperator will report any important informationto the authorities. If you have any concernsabout this feature, you should contact theCommunicator Response Center.

Alarm notificationIf the vehicle’s theft warning system is acti-vated and stays on for more than 7 seconds,the Infiniti Communicator system automati-

cally contacts the Communicator ResponseCenter. Alarm notification functions regardlessof the ignition switch position. The Commu-nicator Response Center will assess the situ-ation and will attempt to call you or youremergency contact, if possible. If you are inthe vehicle, the Communicator Response Cen-ter operator will request your password toverify your identity. It is possible for theCommunicator Response Center to covertlyhear what is going on inside the car when thisfunction is ON. If you have any concernsabout this feature, you should contact theCommunicator Response Center.

FUNCTION AND DESCRIPTION

Automatic redial/auto reset toready

When Infiniti Communicator tries to contactthe Communicator Response Center, but thecellular network is busy, the system attemptsto dial for up to two hours. This time varies

greatly depending on the cellular network andcellular signal strength. The system resets toready when the system completes the dialingattempts. You can press the button again ifyou still need to contact the CommunicatorResponse Center. Infiniti Communicator auto-matically redials if communication betweenyou and the Communicator Response Centeris lost for some reason. The only way for atransmission to be officially terminated is forthe Communicator Response Center to sendan end transmission signal, which turns offthe indicator in the or button. Allinformation sent to the Communicator Re-sponse Center is recorded.

If cellular signal strength is low, it is possiblethat Infiniti Communicator will not be able toterminate the transmission. You may have torepress the button if you still need to contactthe Communicator Response Center.

If there is a natural disaster, such as anearthquake, all of the Communicator Re-

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-40

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 92: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

sponse Center phone lines may become busy.The Infiniti Communicator system in yourvehicle will not attempt to recontact theCommunicator Response Center.

Priority Communicator ResponseCenter dialing

If you are using the optional cellular phoneand the supplemental air bag inflates or the

‘‘Mayday’’ or the ‘‘Information’’button is pressed, your phone transmissionwill be cut so the Infiniti Communicatorsystem can contact the Communicator Re-sponse Center.

RoamingIf you have chosen a local cellular provider foryour optional handset and the company thatyou have contracted with for your cellularphone does not have a roaming agreement forthe area where your vehicle is within the 48contiguous states, it may not be possible touse the lines of a different cellular phone

company. Therefore, it is possible that InfinitiCommunicator will not be able to contact theCommunicator Response Center.

Data transmissionDuring transmission to the CommunicatorResponse Center, data will be collected on thetype of call, vehicle location, direction andspeed at the time of activation.

Global Positioning System func-tionsThe Global Positioning System (GPS) is usedto obtain the vehicle location. GPS satellitestransmit radio waves and orbit around theearth at an altitude of approximately 13,000miles (21,000 km). The GPS receiver calcu-lates the three-dimensional position (latitude,longitude, and altitude from sea level) of thevehicle by using the time differences of radiowaves arriving from several GPS satellites.

You cannot receive any Global PositioningSystem (GPS) data in areas where radio

reception conditions are poor. In such cases,the latest GPS data received will be transmit-ted to the Communicator Response Center.Then, the Communicator Response Center willdetermine the reliability of the GPS data. If thequality of the data is too poor or if the datacannot be located, the Communicator Re-sponse Center operator will ask you for yourvehicle’s position. Factors such as topogra-phy, electronic interference or weather condi-tions may affect GPS data and transmission.

O Since radio waves from the GPS satellitesmay be obstructed when driving throughtunnels, near tall buildings, near denselyplanted trees, underneath double-deck ex-pressways, or in-building parking lots, thesignals may not be received. That is, theenvironment may prevent detection of ve-hicle position or cause errors.

O The US Department of Defense controlsthe GPS satellite signals. Therefore, signal

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-41

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 93: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

transmission accuracy may drop or besuspended.

O Avoid placing objects over the GPS an-tenna installed inside the vehicle and donot place portable telephones and handheld wireless units near the Infiniti Com-municator antennas. Also, keep the frontand/or rear windshield free of snow andice. Since the strength of radio waves fromthe GPS satellites is relatively small, signalquality may drop, resulting in poor or nosignal reception.

Contract with CommunicatorResponse Center

Since your phone number and cellular phoneprogramming are not known before your car ispurchased, your telephone must be properlyprogrammed to be able to contact the Com-municator Response Center from your car.You may want to ask your INFINITI dealer tohelp you setup the Infiniti Communicatorsystem.

When you move or change your cellularphone number, please contact the Communi-cator Response Center at 888-870-9898 tohave the contents of the service contractchanged. This is necessary for Infiniti Com-municator to function properly.

When selling your car, ending your servicecontract with Communicator Response Center,or transferring service, please contact theCommunicator Response Center at888-870-9898.

Activation

You must complete the activation process assoon as possible after service contract iscompleted. Simply press either the

‘‘Mayday’’ emergency or‘‘Information’’ button to begin the activationprocess. A Communicator Response Centeroperator will verify the information from theapplication that you filled out at your INFINITIdealer. The operator also verifies that the GPSsystem functions correctly and provides abrief orientation to the Infiniti Communicatorsystem. Finally, the operator will ask if youwould like to establish a password in thesystem. The Infiniti Communicator systemremains in a demonstration mode until thesetup procedures are completed. If you per-form any operation, the Communicator Re-sponse Center will recognize this operation asa demonstration and will not provide service.A service contract needs to be completedbetween you and the Communicator Response

SII0184

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-42

Z 99.3.30/’98 CA32-D X

Page 94: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Center and an active account must be main-tained for you to receive service from theResponse Center.

Miscellaneous

O Turning the ignition OFF during a call tothe Communicator Response Center willnot interrupt your conversation unlessthere is a problem with the battery. Toprotect the battery, you may want to usethe system while the engine is running(except when running the engine may bedangerous, such as after an accident or inan enclosed space like a garage).

O If you start the engine during a call, yourconversation may be interrupted. Whenthis happens the system may try to resumetransmission once the engine has beenstarted.

O Audio, such as the radio, cassette orcompact disc, is unavailable (Auto mute)as long as Infiniti Communicator is con-

nected to the Communicator ResponseCenter, unless the vehicle is being moni-tored in case of theft or in duress situa-tions.

O When stolen vehicle tracking and alarmnotification are used with the optionalhandset connected, some indications are,at times, sent to the handset.

O When the audio mode is switched to thedata mode on completion of the call abeeping or hissing noise may be heard.The noise occurs because the call is beingmade through the modem. What you hearis the modem switching between voice anddata modes. This is normal and does notindicate a malfunction.

O If battery power is lost, for any reason,during a call to the Communicator Re-sponse Center, Infiniti Communicator willautomatically attempt to redial the Re-sponse Center when battery power isrestored.

INFINITI COMMUNICATORINDICATOR DESCRIPTION

All indicators areON

O All indicators are turned ON for up to 30seconds when the ignition key is turnedfrom OFF to ON. This is normal operation.

O If there is a fault in the system, the‘‘Mayday’’ emergency and

‘‘Information’’ button indicators remain ONand the system may not work correctly.

O If only the ‘‘Mayday’’ emergencybutton indicator is ON when the ignition isturned from OFF to ON and the button wasnot pressed, the Infiniti Communicatorsystem may not be working correctly.

‘‘Mayday’’ emergency but-ton indicator blinking

The ‘‘Mayday’’ emergency button was pressed.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-43

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 95: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Infiniti Communicator is trying to acquire anavailable cellular channel.

‘‘Mayday’’ emergency but-ton indicator ON

The ‘‘Mayday’’ emergency button was pressed.System is connected to a cell and is commu-nicating information to the CommunicatorResponse Center.

‘‘Information’’ button indi-cator blinking

The ‘‘Information’’ button was pressed. InfinitiCommunicator is trying to acquire an avail-able cellular channel.

‘‘Information’’ button indi-cator ON

The ‘‘Information’’ button was pressed. Systemis connected to a cell and is communicatinginformation to the Communicator ResponseCenter.

Redial indicatorON/blinking

The initial connection was not successful.Infiniti Communicator is attempting to redialto contact the Communicator Response Cen-ter. The redial indicator may blink before thebutton indicator blink.

No service indicator ONCellular phone is outside of cellular phonetransmission range. Infiniti Communicator willnot be able to contact the CommunicatorResponse Center until the phone is inside ofcellular phone transmission range. If youchoose the optional handset, the Infiniti Com-municator system’s No service indicator andthe handset display are not synchronized. Thehandset and Infiniti Communicator system Noservice indicator do not turn on or off at thesame time.

Redial and no ser-vice indicators ON

Infiniti Communicator was activated inside ofcellular phone transmission range, but thevehicle was driven out of cellular phonetransmission range. Infiniti Communicatorlost the signal so it tries to redial. InfinitiCommunicator will attempt to reestablish con-tact for 30 minutes.

Redial and no ser-vice indicators al-ternating ON andOFF

Infiniti Communicator is contacting the Com-municator Response Center when InfinitiCommunicator is in demonstration mode.The Communicator Response Centerwill not provide service until the setupprocedures are completed.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-44

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 96: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

OPERATION OF OPTIONALHANDSET

You can choose an optional handset so theInfiniti Communicator system can be used asa normal cellular phone. In order to effectivelyprovide all Infiniti Communicator system fea-tures, only the optional handset available fromyour INFINITI dealer should be installed.Docking stations and other handsets mayinterfere with the Infiniti Communicator sys-tem functions or render the system inoperable.Refer to your handset operational manual forinformation on how to use your handset.

Infiniti Communicator gives preference to theCommunicator Response Center connection.If Infiniti Communicator is activated when youare using the optional handset, your phonetransmission will be cut and Infiniti Commu-nicator will dial the Communicator ResponseCenter. The cellular handset will be disabled,and communication with the CommunicatorResponse Center operator will be carried out

through the hands-free microphone. Aftercommunication with the Communicator Re-sponse Center is finished, the handset lastnumber memory will be erased.

PAYMENT FOR INFINITI COM-MUNICATOR USEIt is the owner’s responsibility to maintain anactive account with the cellular provider andCommunicator Response Center. If either ac-count is inactive, Infiniti Communicator willnot operate.

SYSTEM LIMITATIONSThe Infiniti Communicator system relies onthe cellular network. The Infiniti Communica-tor system is subject to the same limitationsthat affect cellular phone operation.

Since Infiniti Communicator is powered by thevehicle’s battery, if the battery is removed,damaged or discharged, the system will notwork.

Service area

Service is provided in the 48 contiguousstates. Service is not available in Alaska,Hawaii, Canada, or Mexico. The Communica-tor Response Center will not be able to locateyour car outside of the continental UnitedStates.

Inoperative if cellular system isbusy

The number of available cellular lines islimited in a particular area and varies accord-ing to call volume. Once the call volumereaches the maximum, any additional callscannot be processed. When Infiniti Commu-nicator encounters such a situation, the sys-tem attempts to dial for up to two hours. Thistime varies greatly depending on the cellularnetwork and cellular signal strength. Thesystem resets to ready when the systemcompletes the dialing attempts. You can pressthe button again if you still need to contact the

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-45

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 97: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Communicator Response Center. After severalfailed attempts the system will quit dialing andreturn to normal mode.

Cellular PIN features

Some local cellular providers offer customphone numbers that are assigned a PersonalIdentification Number (PIN). The cellularphone user is required to enter the PIN anytime a phone call is made. The InfinitiCommunicator system is not compatible withthe PIN feature. A PIN requirement on yourcellular phone will cause the Infiniti Commu-nicator system to be inoperative. When com-pleting your service contract with your cellularprovider, ask your carrier to assign you anumber that does not require a PIN.

Special cellular featuresSome cellular providers offer special featuressuch as call waiting, voice mail, call forward-ing, etc. These features can interfere withInfiniti Communicator system operation.

Cellular airwave interference

At times you may hear someone other than theCommunicator Response Center operator talk-ing. This is caused by cellular airwave inter-ference and is not caused by an InfinitiCommunicator system malfunction. Generally,if you are driving, the interference will goaway. If cellular airwave interference occurswhen the Infiniti Communicator system istransmitting data to the Communicator Re-sponse Center, the Infiniti Communicator sys-tem automatically switches to voice commu-nications. There may be cases where cellularairwave interference may prevent the InfinitiCommunicator System from completing theconnection to the Communicator ResponseCenter.

Security

The Infiniti Communicator system uses thecellular phone network. Conversations anddata transmissions are not secure. Third

parties may be able to listen to your conver-sation.

Aftermarket accessories

When installing a CB radio or car phone inyour INFINITI, be sure to observe the follow-ing cautions. Otherwise, the new equipmentmay adversely affect the Multiport Fuel Injec-tion system, Infiniti Communicator system, orother electronic parts.

Potentially inoperative if the ve-hicle is in an accident

If you are involved in an accident, InfinitiCommunicator may also be damaged. SinceInfiniti Communicator is powered from thevehicle, damaged Infiniti Communicator re-lated components such as the battery willdisable the system.

Inoperative if cellular phone isinactive or inoperativeInfiniti Communicator will be inoperative if

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-46

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 98: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

you do not have an active cellular accountwith a cellular provider. Since Infiniti Com-municator relies on the cellular network, thesystem will not work if the cellular service oryour cellular phone is inactive.

When the Infiniti Communicator system isoutside of cellular service, the indicatorwill illuminate. If you try to activate InfinitiCommunicator, the request will be canceled.Cellular phone transmission may becometemporarily disabled, or interrupted by envi-ronmental factors such as tunnels, bridges, ortall buildings. When Infiniti Communicatorencounters such a situation, the system at-tempts to dial for up to two hours. This timevaries greatly depending on the cellular net-work and cellular signal strength. The systemresets to ready when the system completes thedialing attempts. You can press the buttonagain if you still need to contact the Commu-nicator Response Center. After several failedattempts the system will quit dialing and

return to normal mode.

Phone number changes

The Infiniti Communicator system is onlycapable of accepting up to 15 phone numberchanges. You may need to purchase InfinitiCommunicator system components if thephone number changes more than 15 times.

CAUTION

O Keep antennas as far away aspossible from electronic controlunits (including radio and InfinitiCommunicator system compo-nents).

O Keep antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the MultiportFuel Injection and Infiniti Com-municator harnesses. Do notroute antenna wires next to any

other harness.

FALSE ACTIVATIONS ANDPASSWORD SELECTIONS

When you complete the contract with theCommunicator Response Center, you will begiven the option of establishing a user pass-word. You are strongly encouraged to estab-lish a password. The password is used toverify your identity in the following situations:

O You will be asked to provide a password ifyour make a request to unlock the doorsby remote operation.

O When the ‘‘Mayday’’ emergency but-ton has been pressed in any nonemer-gency situation. The Communicator Re-sponse Center operator will come onlineand ask for your password to verify youridentity. If an incorrect password is pro-vided, the Communicator Response Center

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-47

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 99: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

operator will assume you are under du-ress. The operator will covertly monitorwhat is happening inside the vehicle andcontact the police. The operator will pro-vide the police with the latest/currentvehicle location. You do not need to havea password if you need emergency ser-vices. If you choose not to establish apassword, simply indicate to the operatorthat the assistance request was initiated inerror and the call will be terminated.

O If the vehicle’s theft warning system wasactivated for more than seven seconds, theInfiniti Communicator system contacts theCommunicator Response Center. TheCommunicator Response Center operatorwill come online and request the passwordfrom the occupant. If no password or anincorrect password is provided, the opera-tor will contact the police and providethem with the latest/current vehicle loca-tion.

Choose a password that will not be easy forsomeone else to figure out.

All other aspects of your service will beidentical regardless of your password deci-sion.

STEERING SWITCH FOR CEL-LULAR PHONE(Models with Infiniti Commu-nicator)

The steering switch except the volumeup/down switch will operate only if the hand-

set is in the cradle. This system allowssteering switching when telephone calls arereceived or terminated. A maximum of sixtelephone numbers which are stored in thememory of the cellular phone can be dialedusing the steering switch operation. For theprocedure to memorize telephone numbers,refer to your cellular phone operation manual.

SWITCH OPERATIONS

Send/endO When a call is received, press the

send/end switch to permit conver-sation.

O At the completion of the conversation,press the send/end switch to termi-nate the call.

O To redial the number of the most recentcall, press the send/end switchwhen the telephone is turned off.

SII0185

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-48

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 100: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Memory select

To select memory 1 to 6, press memoryswitch A or B. Every press on theswitch changes memory as follows:

: memory 1 → 2 → 3 → OFF

: memory 4 → 5 → 6 → OFF

After selecting memory, press send/endswitch to make a call.

You can program phone numbers intomemory only with the optional handset. Youcannot program the memory without the hand-set.

Volume up/down

To adjust the right front door speaker volume,push the volume up/down switch.

Even if you do not choose the optionalhandset, it is possible to receive phone calls.You can also adjust the volume during theconversation. To receive a phone call, press

the send/end switch. The audio systemautomatically turns off (auto mute) during thecall. Press the send/end switch to endthe call. The audio system will automaticallyturn on in about four seconds.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-49

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 101: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual
Page 102: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

3 PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

Keys............................................................. 3-2Doors........................................................... 3-3Locking with key ......................................... 3-3Locking with inside lock knob .................... 3-4Locking with power door lock switch......... 3-4Child safety rear door lock.......................... 3-4Multi-remote control system....................... 3-4How to use multi-remote control system ... 3-6Battery replacement..................................... 3-8Hood ............................................................ 3-9Trunk lid ...................................................... 3-9Opener operation....................................... 3-10

Key operation ............................................ 3-10Fuel filler lid............................................... 3-11Opener operation....................................... 3-11Fuel filler cap............................................. 3-11Steering wheel ........................................... 3-12Tilt operation ............................................. 3-13Mirrors....................................................... 3-13Inside mirror.............................................. 3-13Automatic anti-dazzling inside mirror (if soequipped)................................................... 3-13Outside mirrors ......................................... 3-14

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 103: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using themaster or security keys which are registered to

the Infiniti Vehicle Immobiliser System com-ponents in your vehicle. These keys have atransponder chip in the key head. (The walletkey cannot be used to drive your vehicle.)

The master key and wallet key can be used forall the locks.

When the key case with the wallet keyis placed into your wallet, be carefulnot to apply excessive force to thewallet as it or other cards could bedamaged.

The security key cannot be used for the trunklid or glove box locks.

To protect belongings when you leave a keywith someone, give them the security keyonly.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.Record the key number on the key numberplate supplied with your keys and keep it in asafe place (such as your wallet), not in the

vehicle. INFINITI does not record any keynumbers so it is very important to keep trackof your key number plate.A key number is only necessary when youhave lost all keys and do not have one toduplicate from. If you still have a key, this keycan be duplicated by your INFINITI dealer.INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILISER SYSTEMKEY - Master and Security keys:The key number is necessary when you needextra Infiniti Vehicle Immobiliser System keys.As many as 5 Infiniti Vehicle ImmobiliserSystem keys can be used with one vehicle.New keys must be registered to the InfinitiVehicle Immobiliser System components inyour vehicle by your INFINITI dealer. At thistime, you should bring all Infiniti VehicleImmobiliser System keys that you have toyour INFINITI dealer for registration. This isbecause the registration process will erase allmemory of the Infiniti Vehicle ImmobiliserSystem components.

SIP0209

PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

3-2

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 104: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

DOORS

WARNING

O Always have the doors lockedwhile driving. Along with the useof seat belts, this providesgreater safety in the event of anaccident by helping to preventpersons from being thrown fromthe vehicle. This also helps keepchildren and others from uninten-tionally opening the doors, andwill help keep out intruders.

O Before opening any door, alwayslook for and avoid oncomingtraffic.

O Do not leave children unattendedinside the vehicle. They couldunknowingly activate switches orcontrols. Unattended childrencould become involved in seriousaccidents.

LOCKING WITH KEY

Power

The power door lock system allows you tolock or unlock all doors simultaneously.

O Turning the front door key to the front ofthe vehicle will lock all doors.

O Turning the front door key one time to therear of the vehicle will unlock the corre-sponding door. From that position, return-ing the key to neutral (where the key canonly be removed and inserted.) and turn-ing it to the rear again within 5 secondswill unlock all doors.

SIP0229

PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

3-3

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 105: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOB

Power

Pushing the front door inside lock knob to thelock position will lock all doors.

To lock from the outside without a key, movethe inside lock knob to the lock position. Thenclose the door.

When locking the door this way, be certain notto leave the key inside the vehicle.

The inside lock knob cannot be set to the lockposition with the front doors open and withthe key in the ignition.

LOCKING WITH POWERDOOR LOCK SWITCH

Operating the lock-unlock switch will lock orunlock all doors.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOORLOCK

Child safety locking helps prevent doors frombeing opened accidentally, especially whensmall children are in the vehicle.

When the lever is in the lock position,the rear door can be opened only fromthe outside.

MULTI-REMOTE CONTROLSYSTEMIt is possible to lock/unlock all doors, to open

SIP0051

SIP0054

SIP0052

PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

3-4

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 106: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

the driver’s and front passenger’s windows, torelease the trunk lid and to turn on or off theinterior light by using the remote controllerfrom outside the car.Be sure to remove the key from thevehicle before locking the doors andleaving it.The remote controller can operate at a dis-tance of approximately 49 ft (15 m) from thevehicle. (The effective distance depends uponthe conditions around the vehicle.)As many as four remote controllers can beused with one vehicle. For information con-cerning the purchase and use of additionalremote controllers, contact your INFINITIdealer.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or oc-currences which will damage theremote controller.

O Do not allow the remote control-ler to become wet.

O Do not drop the remote controller.

O Do not strike the remote control-ler sharply against another ob-ject.

O Do not place the remote control-ler for an extended period in anarea where temperatures exceed140°F (60°C).

PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

3-5

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 107: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

HOW TO USE MULTI-REMOTECONTROL SYSTEM

Locking doors

1. Remove the ignition key.

2. Close all of the doors.

3. Push the button on the multi-remotecontroller.

4. All of the doors lock.

5. The hazard indicators flash twice.

When the button is pushed with alldoors locked, the hazard indicator flashestwice as a reminder that the doors are alreadylocked.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the button on the multi-remotecontroller. Only the driver side door un-locks.

2. Push the button on the multi-remoteSIP0055A

PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

3-6

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 108: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

controller again within 5 seconds.The passenger doors unlock.

3. The interior light will stay on for 30seconds when the interior light switch is inthe center j position.

The interior light can be turned off withoutwaiting for 30 seconds by inserting the keyinto the ignition or locking the doors with themulti-remote controller or by pushing theinterior light button to OFF.

Opening the driver’s and frontpassenger’s windows

1. Push the button on the multi-remotecontroller for longer than 1.5 seconds afterthe driver’s door is unlocked.

2. The driver’s and front passenger’s win-dows open.

The driver’s and front passenger’s win-dows also open after all doors are un-locked with the multi-remote controller.

The driver’s and front passenger’swindows cannot be closed by usingthe multi-remote controller.

Releasing the trunk lid

1. Push the button on the multi-remotecontroller for longer than 0.5 second withthe key removed from the key cylinder.

2. The trunk lid opens.

The trunk lid will not open when the trunk lidcancel lever is in the CANCEL position.It can be opened only with the key.

See ‘‘Trunk lid’’ later in this section for cancellever.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-ened, you may activate the panic alarm to callattention as follows:

1. Push the button on the multi-remotecontroller for longer than 1.5 seconds.

2. The panic alarm and headlight will stay onfor 30 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

O It has run for 30 seconds, or

O The or the button is pressed,or

O The button is pushed for longer than1.5 seconds on the multi-remote control-ler.

O The button is pushed for longer than0.5 seconds on multi-remote controller.

PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

3-7

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 109: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Open the lid using a suitable tool.

2. Replace the battery with a new one.Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 orequivalent

3. Close the lid securely.

4. Push the remote controller button two orthree times to check its operation.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 4above.

O An improperly disposed battery canharm the environment. Always con-firm local regulations for battery dis-posal.

O The remote controller is water-proof;however, if it does get wet, immedi-ately wipe completely dry.

O When changing batteries, do not letdust or oil get on the controller.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the manufacturer compli-ance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interferencereceived, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation of thedevice.

SIP0056

PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

3-8

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 110: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

HOOD

1. Pull the hood lock release handle j1located below the instrument panel; thehood will then spring up slightly.

2. Pull the lever j2 at the front of the hoodwith your fingertips and raise the hood.

3. When closing the hood, slowly close thehood and make sure it locks into place.

WARNING

O Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driv-ing. Failure to do so could causethe hood to fly open and result inan accident.

O If you see steam or smoke coming

from the engine compartment, toavoid injury do not open the hood.

TRUNK LID

WARNING

Do not drive with the trunk lid open.This could allow dangerous exhaustgases to be drawn into the vehicle.See ‘‘Precautions when starting anddriving’’ in the ‘‘5. Starting and driv-ing’’ section for exhaust gas.

SIP0057

PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

3-9

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 111: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

OPENER OPERATION

The trunk lid release button is located underthe driver’s arm rest. To open the trunk lid,

push the release button.

To close, push the trunk lid down securely.

Cancel lever

When the lever is in the cancel position, thetrunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lidrelease lever or handle. It can be opened onlywith the key.

KEY OPERATION

To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise.To close, lower and push the trunk lid downsecurely.

SIP0059

SIP0061

SII0230

PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

3-10

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 112: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

FUEL FILLER LIDOPENER OPERATION

To open the fuel filler lid, push the openerswitch located next to the selector lever. Tolock, close the fuel filler lid securely.

FUEL FILLER CAP

WARNING

O Gasoline is extremely flammableand highly explosive under cer-tain conditions. You could beburned or seriously injured if it ismisused or mishandled. Alwaysstop the engine and do not smokeor allow open flames or sparksnear the vehicle when refueling.

O Fuel may be under pressure. Turnthe cap one-half turn, and wait forany hissing sound to stop to pre-vent fuel from spraying out andpossible personal injury. Then re-

move the cap.

O Do not attempt to top off the fueltank after the fuel pump nozzleshuts off automatically.Continued refueling may causefuel overflow, resulting in fuelspray and possibly a fire.

O Use only a genuine fuel filler capas a replacement. It has a built-insafety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system andemission control system. An in-correct cap can result in a seriousmalfunction and possible injury.

O Never pour fuel into the throttlebody to attempt to start yourvehicle.

SIP0062

PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

3-11

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 113: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

CAUTION

O If fuel is spilled on the car body,flush it away with water to avoidpaint damage.

O Tighten until the cap clicks. Fail-ure to tighten fuel cap properlymay cause the Malfunctionindicator light (MIL) to illumi-nate. If this occurs, securelyclose the fuel filler cap. Afterdriven for a while, the lightshould remain off. If the lightremains on, have the vehicle in-spected by an authorized INFINITIdealer. For additional informa-tion, see the ‘‘Malfunction indica-tor light (MIL)’’ in the ‘‘2. Instru-ments and controls’’ section. The fuel filler cap is a screw-on ratcheting

type. Tighten the cap clockwise until ratchet-ing clicks are heard.

Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder whilerefueling.

STEERING WHEEL

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving. You could lose controlof your vehicle and cause an acci-dent.

SIP0204

PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

3-12

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 114: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

TILT OPERATION

Push the lock lever and while holding down,adjust the steering wheel up or down to thedesired position.

Push the lock lever back into place to lock thesteering wheel in place.

MIRRORSINSIDE MIRROR

The night position will reduce glare from theheadlights of vehicles behind you at night.

WARNING

Use the night position only whennecessary, because it reduces rearview clarity.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-DAZZLINGINSIDE MIRROR (if soequipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that itautomatically changes reflection according tothe intensity of the headlight of the followingvehicle.

Push the DAY switch during daylight driving.At night when the headlights of the followingvehicle can cause excessive glare in the insidemirror, push the AUTO switch.

SIP0081

IPD052SIP0205

PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

3-13

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 115: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The outside mirror will operate only when theignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Push the right or left end of the switch toselect the right or left side mirror, then adjustusing the control lever.

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirroron the passenger side are closerthan they appear. Be careful whenmoving to the right. Using only thismirror could cause an accident. Useinside mirror or glance over yourshoulder to properly judge distancesto other objects.

Foldable outside mirrors

Push the outside mirror backward to fold it.

SIP0120 IPD073M

PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

3-14

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 116: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

4 HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS

Ventilators.................................................... 4-2Heater and air conditioner (Automatic)....... 4-3Automatic operation .................................... 4-4Manual operation......................................... 4-5Ambient temperature switch (AMB)............ 4-5Operating tips .............................................. 4-6Servicing air conditioner ............................. 4-6Audio system............................................... 4-6

Radio ........................................................... 4-6FM radio reception ...................................... 4-7AM radio reception...................................... 4-8FM-AM radio with cassette player and compactdisc (CD) player (Bose)............................... 4-9Antenna...................................................... 4-17CB radio or car phone............................... 4-17

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 117: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

VENTILATORS

Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators.

Open or close, and adjust the air flow direc-tion of ventilators.

: This symbol indicates that the ventsare closed when the vent switch ismoved to the left.

: This symbol indicates that the ventsare open when the vent switch ismoved to the right.

SIH0017

SIH0018

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS

4-2

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 118: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (Automatic)

SIH0044

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS

4-3

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 119: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Start the engine and operate the controls toactivate the air conditioner.

WARNING

O The air conditioner cooling func-tion operates only when the en-gine is running.

O Do not leave children, unreliableadults, or pets alone in your ve-hicle. On hot, sunny days, tem-peratures in a closed vehiclecould quickly become highenough to cause severe or possi-bly fatal injuries to people oranimals.

O Do not use the recirculation modefor long periods as it may causethe interior air to become staleand the windows to fog up.

O Positioning of the heater and airconditioner controls should not bedone while driving. In order thatfull attention may be given to thedriving operation.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling and/or dehumidifiedheating (AUTO)

This mode may be normally used all yearround as the system automatically works tokeep a constant temperature. Air flow distri-bution and fan speed are also controlledautomatically.

1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will bedisplayed.)

2. Push the temperature set buttonor to set the desired temperature.

O Adjust the temperature set button to about

75°F (24°C) for normal operation.

O The temperature of the passenger compart-ment will be maintained automatically. Airflow distribution and fan speed are alsocontrolled automatically.

Heating (ECON)

The air conditioner does not activate. Whenyou need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Push the ECON (Economy) button on.(ECON will be displayed.)

2. Push the temperature set buttonor to set the desired temperature.

O The temperature of the passenger compart-ment will be maintained automatically. Airflow distribution and fan speed are alsocontrolled automatically.

O Do not set the temperature lower than theoutside air temperature. Otherwise the sys-tem may not work properly.

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS

4-4

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 120: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

O Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defogging

1. Push the DEF button on. (The indi-cator light on the button will come on.)

2. Push the temperature set buttonor to set the desired temperature.

O To quickly remove ice or fog from theoutside of the windows, push the manualfan control button and set to themaximum position .

O As soon as possible after the windshield isclean, push the AUTO button to return tothe auto mode.

O When the DEF button is pushed, theair conditioner will automatically be turnedon at outside temperatures above 35°F(2°C) to defog the windshield, and the airrecirculation mode will automatically beturned off.

Outside air is drawn into the passenger

compartment to improve the defoggingperformance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed controlPush the fan control button to manuallycontrol the fan speed.

Push the AUTO button to return to automaticcontrol of the fan speed.

Air recirculationPush the air recirculation button torecirculate interior air inside the vehicle. Theindicator light on the switch will come on.

Push it again to make the air inlet controlledautomatically (FRESH, REC/PRE and RECIR-CULATION). The indicator will go out.

The air recirculation button will not be acti-vated when the air conditioner is in DEFmode.

Air flow controlPushing the manual air flow control buttonselects the air outlet to:

: Air flows from center and side venti-lators.

: Air flows from center and side venti-lators and foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

: Air flow from defroster and foot out-lets.

To turn system offPush the OFF button.

AMBIENT TEMPERATURESWITCH (AMB)Push the ambient temperature switch. Theoutside ambient temperature will be displayedfor approximately 5 seconds.

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS

4-5

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 121: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

OPERATING TIPS

When the engine coolant temperature andoutside air temperature are low, the air flowfrom the foot outlets may not operate for amaximum of 150 seconds. However, this isnot a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-ture warms up, the air flow from the footoutlets will operate normally.

The sensor on the instrument panel helpsmaintain a constant temperature; do not putanything on or around this sensor.

SERVICING AIR CONDI-TIONERThe air conditioning system in your INFINITIvehicle is charged with a new refrigerantdesigned with the environment in mind. Thisnew refrigerant will not harm the earth’sozone layer. However special chargingequipment and lubricant are required whenservicing your INFINITI air conditioner. Usingimproper refrigerants or lubricants will causesevere damage to your air conditioning system.See ‘‘Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants’’ in the ‘‘10. Technical and consumerinformation’’ section for air conditioning sys-tem refrigerant and lubricant recommendations.

Your INFINITI dealer will be able to serviceyour environmentally friendly air conditioningsystem.

WARNING

The air conditioner system containsrefrigerant under high pressure. Toavoid personal injury, any air condi-tioner service should be done onlyby an experienced technician withproper equipment.

AUDIO SYSTEM

RADIO

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON and pressthe power on switch to turn on the radio. Ifyou listen to the radio with the engine notrunning, the key should be turned to the ACCposition.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter,buildings, bridges, mountains and other ex-

IHA017M

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS

4-6

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 122: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

ternal influences. Intermittent changes in re-ception quality normally are caused by theseexternal influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near thevehicle may influence radio receptionquality.

Radio receptionYour INFINITI radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhanceradio reception. These circuits are designed toextend reception range, and to enhance thequality of that reception.

However there are some general characteris-tics of both FM and AM radio signals that canaffect radio reception quality in a movingvehicle, even when the finest equipment isused. These characteristics are completelynormal in a given reception area, and do notindicate any malfunction in your INFINITIradio system.

Remember that a moving vehicle is not the

ideal place to listen to a radio. Because of themovement, reception conditions will con-stantly change. Buildings, terrain, signal dis-tance and interference from other vehicles canwork against ideal reception. Described beloware some of the factors that can affect yourradio reception.

FM RADIO RECEPTIONRange: FM range is normally limited to 25 to30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (singlechannel) FM having slightly more range thanstereo FM. External influences may sometimes

interfere with FM station reception even if theFM station is within 25 miles (40 km). Thestrength of the FM signal is directly related tothe distance between the transmitter andreceiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sightpath, exhibiting many of the same character-istics as light. For example they will reflect offobjects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves awayfrom a station transmitter, the signals will tendto fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interferencefrom buildings, large hills or due to antennaposition, usually in conjunction with in-creased distance from the station transmitter,static or flutter can be heard. This can bereduced by adjusting the treble control coun-terclockwise to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflectivecharacteristics of FM signals, direct and re-flected signals reach the receiver at the same

IHA018M

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS

4-7

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 123: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

time. The signals may cancel each other,resulting in momentary flutter or loss ofsound.

AM RADIO RECEPTIONAM signals, because of their low frequency,can bend around objects and skip along theground. In addition, the signals can bebounced off the ionosphere and bent back toearth. Because of these characteristics. AMsignals are also subject to interference as theytravel from transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areas withmany tall buildings. It can also occur forseveral seconds during ionospheric turbu-lence even in areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricalpower lines, electric signs and even trafficlights.

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS

4-8

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 124: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

FM-AM RADIO WITH CAS-SETTE PLAYER AND COM-PACT DISC (CD) PLAYER(Bose)

SIH0047

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS

4-9

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 125: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Audio main operationHead unit

The radio has an FM diversity receptionsystem, which employs two antennas. One isa rod type antenna; the other is an antennaprinted on the window. This system automati-cally switches to the antenna which is receiv-ing less noise.

The tape deck employs a permalloy headwhich allows for improved reproduction ofhigh frequency ranges. Noise is also greatlyreduced by the combined use of the Dolby NR(Noise Reduction) system. The auto loudnesscircuit enhances the low frequency rangeautomatically in both radio reception and tapeand CD playback.

ONzOFF/Volume control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and thenpush the ONzOFF/VOL control knob while thesystem is off to call up the mode (radio, tapeor CD) which was playing immediately before

the system was turned off. When no CD ortape is loaded, the radio will come on. Whilethe system is on, pushing the ONzOFF/VOLcontrol knob turns the system off.

To turn the radio off, press the ONzOFF/VOLcontrol knob.

Turn the ONzOFF/VOL control knob to adjustthe volume.

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS

4-10

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 126: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Adjusting tone quality and speakerbalance:

To adjust BASS, TRE (Treble), BAL (Balance)and FAD (Fader), press the AUDIO button untilthe desired mode BAS, TRE, FAD, or BALappears in the display.

Press the or button to adjustBass (BAS) and Treble (TRE) to the desiredlevel. Use the or button also toadjust Fader (FAD) or Balance (BAL) modes.

FAD adjusts the sound level between the front

and rear speakers and BAL adjusts the soundbetween the right and left speakers.

After 10 seconds, the radio or cassette tapedisplay reappears. Once the sound quality isset to the desired level, press the AUDIObutton repeatedly until the radio or cassettetape display appears.

FM-AM radio operationFM/AM band select:

Pushing the FM/AM band select button willchange the band FM1, FM2 or AM.

When FM/AM band select button is pushedwhile the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON,the radio will come on at the station lastplayed.

The last station played will also come on whenthe power knob is turned to ON.

If a compact disc or tape is playing when theFM/AM band select button is turned to ON,the compact disc or tape will automatically beturned off and the last radio station played willcome on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broad-cast signal is weak, the radio will automati-cally change from stereo to monaural recep-tion.

SIH0049

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS

4-11

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 127: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

TUNE (Tuning):

Use these buttons for manual tuning. To movequickly through the channels, hold either ofthe TUNE buttons down for more than 0.5seconds.

WARNING

The radio should not be tuned whiledriving in order that full attentionmay be given to the driving opera-tion.

SEEK/SCAN tuning:

SEEK tuning

Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button orfor less than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuning

begins from high to low or low to highfrequencies and stops at the next broadcastingstation.

SCAN tuning

Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button orfor more than 1.5 seconds. SCAN

tuning begins from high to low or low to highfrequencies and stops at each broadcastingstation for 10 seconds. Pushing the buttonagain during this 10 seconds period will stopSCAN tuning and the radio will remain tunedto that station.

If the SEEK/SCAN tuning button is not pushedwithin 10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to thenext station.

SIH0048

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS

4-12

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 128: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Station memory operations:

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band(six for FM1, six for FM2).

Six stations can be set for the AM band.

1. Tune to the desired station using theSEEK/SCAN or TUNE button.

2. Push the desired station select button formore than 1.5 seconds. (For example, inthe diagram ch2 is to be memorized. Theradio mutes when the select button ispushed.)

3. The indicator ch2 will then come on andthe sound will resume. Memorizing is nowcomplete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the samemanner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if thefuse blows, the radio memory will be can-celled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Cassette tape player operationTurn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and thenlightly insert the cassette tape into the tapedoor. The cassette tape will be automaticallypulled into the player.

The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) andthe cassette tape will begin to play.

CAUTION

Do not force the cassette tape intothe tape door. This could causeplayer damage.

If the system is turned off by pushing theONzOFF/VOL control knob with the cassettetape still in the player, the tape will resumeplaying when the system is turned back on.

Precautions on cassette tape playeroperation:

O To maintain good quality sound,INFINITI recommends that you usecassette tapes of 60 minutes orshorter in length.

O Cassette tapes should be removedfrom the player when not in use.Store cassettes in their protectivecases and away from direct sunlight,heat, dust, moisture or magneticsources.

Direct sunlight can cause the cas-sette to become deformed. The useof deformed cassettes may causethe cassette to jam in the player.

O Do not use cassettes that have peel-ing or loose labels. If used, the labelcould jam in the player.

O If a cassette has loose tape, insert apencil through one of the cassette

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS

4-13

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 129: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

hubs and rewind the tape firmly.Loose tape may cause jamming andwavering sound quality.

O Over a period of time, the playbackhead, capstan and pinch roller maygather a tape coating residue as thetape passes over the head. Thisresidue accumulation can cause aweak or wavering sound and shouldbe removed periodically with a headcleaning tape.

If the residue is not removed peri-odically, the player may need to bedisassembled for cleaning.

PLAY:

O When the TAPE button is pushed with thesystem turned off and a tape loaded, thesystem will come on and the tape will play.

O When the TAPE button is pushed witheither the radio or compact disc turned onand the tape loaded, the compact disc or

the radio will automatically be turned offand the tape will play.

FF (Fast Forward),REW (Rewind):

Push the (fast forward) button to fastforward the tape. To rewind the tape, push the

(rewind) button. Either the FF or REWsymbol illuminates on the right side of thedisplay window.

To stop the FF or REW function, press the(fast forward) or (rewind) again,

or the TAPE button.

APS (AutomaticProgram Search)FF, APS REW:

When the (APS FF) button is pushedwhile the tape is being played, the nextprogram will start to play from the beginning.Push the (APS FF) button several timesto skip through programs. The tape willadvance the number of times the button is

pushed (up to nine programs).

When the (APS REW) button is pushedonce, the program being played starts overfrom the beginning. Push the (APSREW) button several times to skip backseveral selections. The tape will go back thenumber of times the button is pushed. Eitherthe FF or REW symbol flashes on the rightside of the display window while searching forthe selection.

This system searches for the blank intervalsbetween selections. If there is a blank intervalwithin one program or there is no intervalbetween programs, the system may not stop inthe desired or expected location.

PROG (Program):

Push the PROG button to change the tape sidewhile the tape is being played.

The cassette tape will automatically changedirections to play the other side when the firstside is completed.

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS

4-14

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 130: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Dolby NR (Noise Reduction):

Push the Dolby NR button for Dolby NRencoded tapes to reduce high frequency tapenoise. The indicator will come on.

Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation. Dolby NR and the double-Dsymbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-ratories Licensing Corporation.

Metal or chrome tape usage:

The cassette player will be automatically set tohigh performance play when playing a metalor chrome cassette tape.

TAPE EJECT:

When this button is pushed with the tapeloaded, the tape will be ejected.

When the tape is ejected while it is beingplayed, the system will be turned off.

Compact disc (CD) player opera-tion

CAUTION

O During cold weather or rainydays, the player may malfunctiondue to the humidity. If this oc-curs, remove the CD and dehu-midify or ventilate the playercompletely.

O The player may skip while drivingon rough roads.

O The CD player sometimes cannotfunction when the compartmenttemperature is extremely high.Decrease the temperature beforeuse.

O Do not expose the CD to directsunlight.

O CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,scratched, or covered with finger-prints may not work properly.

O Do not use an 8 cm CD adapter asthis will cause malfunction.

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ONposition and insert the compact disc into theslot with the label side facing up. The compactdisc will be guided automatically into the slotand start playing.

After loading the disc, the number of tracks onthe disc and the play time will appear on thedisplay.

If the radio or tape is already operating, it willautomatically turn off and the compact discwill play.

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS

4-15

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 131: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

CAUTION

Do not force the compact disc intothe slot. This could damage theplayer.

If the system has been turned off while thecompact disc was playing, pushing theONzOFF/VOL control knob will start the com-pact disc.

8 cm diameter compact discs can also beused without an adapter.

PLAY:

When the CD/CHG button is pushed with thesystem off and the compact disc loaded, thesystem will turn on and the compact disc willstart to play.

When the CD/CHG button is pushed with thecompact disc loaded but the tape or the radio

playing, the tape or radio will automatically beturned off and the compact disc will start toplay.

FF (Fast Forward),REW (Rewind):

When the (fast forward) or (re-wind) button is pushed while the compact discis being played, the compact disc will playwhile fast forwarding or rewinding. When thebutton is released, the compact disc willreturn to normal play speed.

APS (AutomaticProgram Search)FF, APS REW:

When the (APS FF) button is pushedwhile the compact disc is being played, theprogram next to the present one will start toplay from its beginning. Push several times toskip through programs. The compact disc willadvance the number of times the button ispushed. (When the last program on the

compact disc is skipped through, the firstprogram will be played.) When the

(APS REW) button is pushed, the pro-gram being played returns to its beginning.Push several times to skip back throughprograms. The compact disc will go back thenumber of times the button is pushed.

PROG (Program):

When the PROG button is pushed while thecompact disc is being played, the play patternwill change as follows:

no mark: All the programs will be playedrepeatedly in sequence.

1: Only one program (the one being playedwhen the PROG button is pushed) will berepeated.

RANDOM: Programs will be played at random,not following the sequence on the compactdisc. The same program may be repeatedtwice.

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS

4-16

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 132: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

When the compact disc is ejected, theplay pattern will automatically change tono mark.

CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with thecompact disc loaded, the compact disc will beejected.

When this button is pushed while the compactdisc is being played, the compact disc willcome out and the system will turn off.

If the compact disc comes out and is notremoved, it will be pulled back into theslot to protect it.

CD IN indicator:

CD IN indicator appears on the display whenthe CD is loaded with the system on.

ANTENNA

Power antennaThe antenna will automatically extend when

the radio is turned on, and retract whenswitched off. If the radio is left on, the antennawill retract and extend with the ignition keyOFF-ON operation.

CAUTION

O Before turning the radio on, makesure that there is no one near theantenna outlet and there isenough space for it to extend.

O To prevent damage, be sure thatantenna is fully retracted beforethe vehicle enters an automatedcar wash.

O Dirt and other foreign matter onthe power antenna rod may inter-rupt its operation. Clean the rodperiodically with a damp cloth.This type of cleaning is especiallyimportant during the winter sea

sons in areas where road salt andother chemicals may be spreadon road surfaces and splashedonto the antenna rod.

O If equipped with the Infiniti Com-municator system, the power an-tenna may automatically extendand retract when the battery cableis connected after it has beendisconnected. This is normal anddoes not affect the performanceof the audio and Infiniti Commu-nicator systems.

CB RADIO OR CAR PHONEIf equipped with a genuine cellular phone,your INFINITI features a non-directional mi-crophone, so it is not necessary to look at orspeak directly into the microphone whencalling. To do so could detract from the

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS

4-17

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 133: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

driving operation and cause an accident.

See the manual for car phone operation.

All INFINITI I30 models are pre-wired toaccept the genuine INFINITI cellular phones.

When installing a CB radio or a car phone inyour INFINITI, be sure to observe the follow-ing cautions, otherwise the new equipmentmay adversely affect the MFI (Multiport FuelInjection) system and other electronic parts.

CAUTION

O Keep the antenna as far as pos-sible away from the ElectronicControl Unit (including radio).

O Keep the antenna wire more than8 in (20 cm) away from the MFIharness. Do not route the antennawire next to any harness.

O Adjust the antenna standing-waveratio as recommended by themanufacturer.

O Connect the ground wire from theCB radio chassis to the body.

O For details, consult your INFINITIdealer.

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS

4-18

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 134: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

5 STARTING AND DRIVING

Precautions when starting and driving ....... 5-2Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)................. 5-2Three way catalyst....................................... 5-3Avoiding collision and rollover.................... 5-4Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving............. 5-4Ignition switch............................................. 5-5Automatic transmission............................... 5-5Manual transmission ................................... 5-6Key positions............................................... 5-6Infiniti Vehicle Immobiliser System ............ 5-7Before starting the engine........................... 5-7Starting the engine ...................................... 5-7Driving the vehicle....................................... 5-8Automatic transmission............................... 5-8Manual transmission ................................. 5-12Parking brake ............................................ 5-13Cruise control ............................................ 5-14Precautions on cruise control ................... 5-15

Cruise control operations .......................... 5-16Break-in schedule ...................................... 5-17Increasing fuel economy ........................... 5-17Parking/parking on hills ............................ 5-18Power steering .......................................... 5-19Brake system............................................. 5-20Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ................... 5-20Traction control system(if so equipped)......................................... 5-22Cold weather driving ................................. 5-23Freeing a frozen door lock ........................ 5-23Anti-freeze.................................................. 5-23Battery ....................................................... 5-23Draining of coolant water.......................... 5-23Tire equipment .......................................... 5-23Special winter equipment .......................... 5-24Driving on snow or ice.............................. 5-24Engine block heater (if so equipped) ........ 5-25

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 135: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

PRECAUTIONS WHENSTARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING

Do not leave children, unreliableadults, or pets alone in your vehicle.They could accidentally injure them-selves or others through inadvertentoperation of the vehicle. Also, onhot, sunny days, temperatures in aclosed vehicle could quickly becomehigh enough to cause severe or pos-sibly fatal injuries to people oranimals.

EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monox-ide)

WARNING

Do not breathe exhaust gases; theycontain colorless and odorless car-bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide isdangerous. It can cause uncon-sciousness or death.

O If you suspect that exhaust fumesare entering the vehicle, drivewith all windows fully open, andhave the vehicle inspected imme-diately.

O Do not run the engine in closedspaces such as a garage.

O Do not park the vehicle with theengine running for any extendedlength of time.

O Keep the trunk lid, closed whiledriving, otherwise exhaust gasescould be drawn into the passen-ger compartment. If you mustdrive with the trunk lid open,follow these precautions.

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculationswitch OFF and the fan con-trol at 4 (high) to circulatethe air.

3. Be sure the rear seat armrestand tray are closed.

O If electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass to a trailerthrough the seal on the trunk lidor the body, follow the manufac-turer’s recommendation to pre-vent carbon monoxide entry

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-2

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 136: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

into the vehicle.

O If a special body or other equip-ment is added for recreational orother usage, follow the manufac-turer’s recommendation to pre-vent carbon monoxide entry intothe vehicle. (Some recreationalvehicle appliances such asstoves, refrigerator, heaters, etc.may also generate carbon monox-ide.)

O The exhaust system and bodyshould be inspected by a quali-fied mechanic whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for ser-vice.

b. You suspect that exhaustfumes are entering into the

passenger compartment.

c. You notice a change in thesound of the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accidentinvolving damage to the ex-haust system, underbody, orrear of the vehicle.

THREE WAY CATALYST

The three way catalyst is an emission controldevice installed in the exhaust system. Ex-haust gases in the converter are burned athigh temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

O The exhaust gas and the exhaustsystem are very hot. Keep

people, animals or flammablematerials away from the exhaustpipe.

O Do not stop or park the vehicleover flammable materials such asdry grass, waste paper or rags.They may ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

O Do not use leaded gasoline.Deposits from leaded gasolineseriously reduce the three waycatalyst’s ability to help reduceexhaust pollutants.

O Keep your engine tuned up. Mal-functions in the ignition, fuel in-jection, or electrical systems can

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-3

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 137: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

cause overrich fuel flow into thethree way catalyst, causing it tooverheat. Do not keep driving ifthe engine misfires, or if notice-able loss of performance or otherunusual operating conditions aredetected. Have the vehicle in-spected promptly by an autho-rized INFINITI dealer.

O Avoid driving with an extremelylow fuel level. Running out of fuelcould cause the engine to misfire,damaging the three way catalyst.

O Do not race the engine whilewarming it up.

O Do not push or tow your vehicle tostart the engine.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in asafe and prudent manner may resultin loss of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessivespeed, high speed cornering, or sudden steer-ing maneuvers, because these driving prac-tices could cause you to lose control of yourvehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss ofcontrol could result in a collision withother vehicles or objects, or cause thevehicle to rollover, particularly if theloss of control causes the vehicle toslide sideways. Be attentive at all times,and avoid driving when tired. Never drivewhen under the influence of alcohol or drugs(including prescription or over-the-counter

drugs which may cause drowsiness). Alwayswear your seat belt. See ‘‘Seat Belts’’ in the ‘‘1.Seats, restraints and supplemental air bagsystems’’ section. And also instruct yourpassengers to do so.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence ofalcohol or drugs. Alcohol in thebloodstream reduces coordination,delays reaction time and impairsjudgement. Driving after drinking al-cohol increases the likelihood of be-ing involved in an accident injuringyourself and others. Additionally, ifyou are injured in the accident, al-cohol can increase the severity ofthe injury.

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-4

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 138: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

INFINITI is committed to safe driving. But, youmust choose not to drive under the influenceof alcohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol related accidents.Although the local laws vary on what isconsidered to be legally intoxicated, the fact isthat alcohol affects all people differently andmost people underestimate the effects ofalcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!

And that’s true for drugs too (over the counter,prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive ifyour ability to operate your vehicle is impairedby alcohol, drugs, or some other physicalcondition.

IGNITION SWITCH

WARNING

Never remove the key while driving.If the key is removed, the steeringwheel will lock. This may cause thedriver to lose control of the vehicleand could result in serious vehicledamage or personal injury.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

On automatic transmission models, the igni-tion lock is designed so that the key cannot beturned to LOCK and removed until the selectorlever is moved to the P (Park) position.

When removing the key from the ignition,make sure the selector lever is in the P (Park)position.

If the selector lever is not returned to the P(Park) position, the key cannot be movedtoward LOCK.

When the key cannot be turned toward theLOCK position, proceed as follows to removethe key:

1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)position.

2. Turn the ignition key slightly in the ONdirection.

3. Turn the key toward the LOCK position.

4. Remove the key.SIS0002

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-5

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 139: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

If the key is removed from the ignition switch,the selector lever cannot be moved from the P(Park) position. The selector lever can bemoved if the ignition switch is in theACC position. This allows the vehicle tobe moved if the battery is discharged.The selector lever can also be moved ifthe ignition switch is in the ON positionand the foot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position in between LOCKand ACC, although it does not show on thelock cylinder. When the ignition is in OFF thesteering wheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/6 of a turn counter-clockwise from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, remove thekey. To unlock the steering wheel, in-sert the key and turn it gently whilerotating the steering wheel slightlyright and left.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

On manual transmission models, to turn theignition key to LOCK from ACC or ON, turnthe key to OFF and press in the key releasebutton, then turn the key to LOCK.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/6 of a turn counter-clockwise from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, remove thekey. To unlock the steering wheel, in-sert the key and turn it gently while

rotating the steering wheel slightlyright and left.

KEY POSITIONS

The switch includes an anti-theft steering lockdevice.

LOCK (Normal parking position) (0)

The ignition key can only be removed whenthe switch is in this position.

OFF (1)

The engine can be turned off without lockingthe steering wheel.

ACC (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessoriessuch as the radio when the engine is notrunning.

ON (Normal operating position) (3)

This position turns on the ignition system andthe electrical accessories.

ISD009-A

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-6

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 140: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

START (4)

This position activates the starter motor,starting the engine.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBIL-ISER SYSTEM

The Infiniti Vehicle Immobiliser System willnot allow the engine to start without the use ofthe registered Infiniti Vehicle Immobiliser Sys-tem key.

If the engine fails to start using the registeredInfiniti Vehicle Immobiliser System key (forexample, when interference is caused byanother Infiniti Vehicle Immobiliser Systemkey, an automated toll road device or auto-mated payment device on the key ring), restartthe engine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position and wait approximately 5 sec-onds.

3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered Infiniti VehicleImmobiliser System key.

If the no start condition still occurs, INFINITIrecommends placing the registered InfinitiVehicle Immobiliser System key on a separatekey ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

BEFORE STARTING THE EN-GINEO Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

O Maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically, e.g., each time youcheck engine oil.

O Check that all windows and lights areclean.

O Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also check tires for properinflation.

O Lock all doors.

O Position seat and adjust head restraints.

O Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

O Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers todo likewise.

O Check the operation of warning lightswhen key is turned to the ON (3) position.

STARTING THE ENGINE1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission:

Move the selector lever to P (Park) or N(Neutral). (P preferred.)

The selector lever cannot be moved out of

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-7

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 141: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

the P (Park) position and into any of theother gear positions if the key is removedfrom the switch.

The starter is designed not to operate if theselector lever is in one of the drivingpositions.

Manual transmission:

Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)position, and depress the clutch pedal tothe floor while cranking the engine.

The starter is designed not to operateunless the clutch pedal is fully depressed.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off theaccelerator pedal by turning the igni-tion key to START. Release the key whenthe engine starts. If the engine starts, butfails to run, repeat the above procedure.

O If the engine is very hard to startin extremely cold or hotweather, depress the accelera-

tor pedal and hold it to help startthe engine.

O In the summer, when restartingthe engine within 30 minutesafter it has been stopped, keepthe accelerator pedal fully de-pressed while starting.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for morethan 10 seconds at a time. If theengine does not start, turn the keyoff and wait 10 seconds beforecranking again, otherwise the startercould be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30seconds after starting. Drive at moderate

speed for a short distance first, especiallyin cold weather.

DRIVING THE VEHICLEAUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONThe automatic transmission in your vehicle iselectronically controlled by a transmissioncontrol module to produce maximum powerand smooth operation.

Shown on the following pages are the recom-mended operating procedures for this trans-mission. Follow these procedures for maxi-mum vehicle performance and drivingenjoyment.

Starting the vehicleAfter starting the engine, fully depress the footbrake pedal before shifting the selector leverto the R, N, D, 2 or 1 position. Be sure thevehicle is fully stopped before attempting toshift the selector lever.

This automatic transmission is de-

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-8

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 142: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

signed so the foot brake pedal must bedepressed before shifting from the P(Park) position to any drive positionwhile the ignition switch is ON.

The selector lever cannot be moved outof the P (Park) position and into any ofthe other gear positions if the key isremoved from the switch.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed andshift into a driving gear.

2. Release the parking brake and foot brake,then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

WARNING

O Do not depress the acceleratorpedal while shifting from P or N toR, D, 2 or 1. Always depress thebrake pedal until shifting is com-pleted. Failure to do so could

cause you to lose control andhave an accident.

O Cold engine idle speed is high, souse caution when shifting into aforward or reverse gear beforethe engine has warmed up.

O Never shift to P or R while vehicleis moving. This could cause anaccident.

O On slippery roads, do not down-shift. This may cause a loss ofcontrol.

CAUTION

When stopping the vehicle on anuphill grade, do not hold the vehicleby depressing the accelerator pedal.

The foot brakes should be used forthis purpose.

Shifting

Push the button to shift into P, R or from D to2. All other positions can be selected withoutpushing the button.

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicle isparked or when starting the engine. Always be

ISD002

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-9

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 143: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

sure the vehicle is at a complete stop. Formaximum safety, depress the brake pedal,then push in the select lever button and movethe lever to the P (Park) position. Apply theparking brake. When parking on a hill, applythe parking brake first, then shift the lever intothe P (Park) position.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Always be surethe vehicle is completely stopped. With thebrake pedal depressed, push in the selectlever button and move the lever to the R(Reverse) position.

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.The engine can be started in this position. Youmay shift to the N (Neutral) position andrestart a stalled engine while the vehicle ismoving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forwarddriving.

2 (Second gear):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking ondownhill grades.

Do not exceed 73 MPH (117 km/h) in the 2(Second gear) position.

1 (Low gear):

Use this position when climbing steep hillsslowly or driving slowly through deep snow,sand or mud, or for maximum engine brakingon steep downhill grades.

Do not exceed 40 MPH (65 km/h) in the 1(Low gear) position.

Shifting from P (Park)If the ignition switch is in the ON position andthe foot brake pedal is depressed, but theselector lever still cannot be moved out of the

P (Park) position, follow these instructions:

1. Shut the engine off and remove the key.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Reinsert the ignition key and turn it clock-wise to the ACC position.

4. Depress the brake pedal, move the selectorlever to the N (Neutral) position and startthe engine.

5. Check stop light operation.

WARNING

If the selector lever cannot be movedfrom the P (Park) position while theengine is running and the brakepedal depressed, the stop lights maynot work. Malfunctioning stop lightscould cause an accident injuringyourself and others.

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-10

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 144: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

These instructions for starting the vehicle inthe N (Neutral) position should only be useduntil service can be obtained. Never drive thevehicle if the stop lights are not operatingproperly.Accelerator downshift — In Dposition —For rapid passing or hill climbing, fullydepress the accelerator pedal to the floor. Thisshifts the transmission down into second gearor first gear, depending on the vehicle speed.Overdrive switch

Each time your vehicle is started, the trans-mission is automatically reset to overdriveON.

ON: For normal driving the overdriveswitch is engaged. The transmissionis upshifted into overdrive as thevehicle speed increases.

The overdrive does not engage until theengine has warmed up.

OFF: For driving up and down long slopeswhere engine braking would be ad-vantageous, push the overdriveswitch. The O/D OFF light illumi-nates. When cruising at a low speedor climbing a gentle slope, you mayfeel uncomfortable shift shocks as thetransmission shifts between third andoverdrive repeatedly. In this case,press the overdrive switch. The O/DOFF indicator light comes on at thistime.

When driving conditions change, press theoverdrive switch again. The O/D OFF indicatorlight goes out.

Remember not to drive at high speeds forextended periods of time with the O/D OFFlight illuminated. This reduces the fueleconomy.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, the nexttime the key is turned to the ON position, theO/D OFF light will blink for approximately 8seconds after coming on for 2 seconds. Whilethe vehicle can be driven under these circum-stances please note that the gears in theautomatic transmission will be locked in thirdgear.

If the vehicle is driven under extremeconditions, such as excessive wheelspinning and subsequent hard braking,the fail-safe system may be activated.This will occur even if all electrical

SIS0031

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-11

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 145: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

circuits are functioning properly. In thiscase, turn the ignition key OFF and waitfor 3 seconds. Then turn the key back tothe ON position. The vehicle shouldreturn to its normal operating condi-tion. If it does not return to its normaloperating condition, have your INFINITIdealer check the transmission and re-pair if necessary.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Shifting

To change gears, fully depress the clutchpedal, then move the shift lever. After shifting,release the clutch slowly.On the five-speed transmission model, youcannot shift directly from fifth gear into the R(Reverse) position. First shift into the N(Neutral) position, then into the R (Reverse)position.If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R(Reverse) or 1 (Low gear), shift into N(Neutral), then release the clutch pedal andshift into R (Reverse) or 1 (Low gear) again.

WARNING

O Do not downshift abruptly on slip-pery roads. This may cause a lossof control.

O Do not over-rev the engine whenshifting to a lower gear. This may

cause a loss of control or enginedamage.

CAUTION

O Do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal while driving. This maycause clutch damage.

O Stop your vehicle completely be-fore shifting into R (Reverse).

O When the vehicle is stopped for aduration, for example at a stoplight, shift to N (Neutral) andrelease the clutch pedal with thefoot brake applied.

Suggested up-shift speeds

Shown below are suggested vehicle speedsfor shifting into a higher gear. These sugges-

ISD006

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-12

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 146: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

tions relate to fuel economy and vehicleperformance. Actual up-shift speeds will varyaccording to road conditions, the weather andindividual driving habits.

For normal acceleration in low altitude areas[less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:

Gear changeACCEL

shift pointMPH (km/h)

CRUISEshift point

MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 13 (21) 13 (21)

2nd to 3rd 23 (37) 16 (26)

3rd to 4th 33 (53) 27 (43)

4th to 5th 39 (63) 36 (58)

For quick acceleration when the engine is cold orin high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:

Gear change MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

Suggested maximum speed ineach gearDownshift to a lower gear if the engine is notrunning smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed(shown below) in any gear. For level roaddriving, use the highest gear suggested forthat speed. Always observe posted speedlimits, and drive according to the road con-ditions, which will ensure safe operation. Donot over-rev the engine when shifting to alower gear as it may cause engine damage orloss of vehicle control.

Gear MPH (km/h)

1st 30 (48)

2nd 55 (88)

3rd 80 (128)

4th —

5th —

PARKING BRAKE

SIS0003

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-13

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 147: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

To apply: pull the lever up.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Automatic transmission models:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park)position.

Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral)position.

3. While pulling up on the lever slightly,push the button and lower completely.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

WARNING

O Be sure the parking brake is fullyreleased before driving. Failure

to do so can cause brake failureand lead to an accident.

O Do not release the parking brakefrom outside the vehicle.

O Do not use the gear shift in placeof the parking brake. When park-ing, be sure the parking brake isfully engaged.

O Do not leave children unattendedin a vehicle. They could releasethe parking brake and cause anaccident.

CRUISE CONTROL

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when

driving under the following condi-tions:

O it is not possible to keep thevehicle at set speed.

O in heavy traffic or in traffic thatvaries in speed.

O on winding roads, or hilly roads.

O on slippery roads (rain, snow,ice, etc.)

O in very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of ve-hicle control and result in an acci-dent.

CAUTION

On manual transmission models, do

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-14

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 148: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

not shift into N (Neutral) withoutdepressing the clutch pedal whenthe cruise control is on. This couldcause engine damage. If this hap-pens, depress the clutch pedal andturn the main switch offimmediately.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

O If the cruise control system malfunctions,it will cancel automatically. The cruiseindicator light in the instrument panel willthen blink to warn the driver.

O When the cruise indicator light blinks, turnthe cruise control switch (main switch)OFF and have the system checked by yourINFINITI dealer.

O The cruise indicator light may blink whenthe cruise control main switch is turned

ON while pushing the RES/ACCEL,COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (locatedon the steering wheel). To properly set thecruise control system perform the stepsabove in the order indicated.

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-15

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 149: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

CRUISE CONTROL OPERA-TIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speedbetween 30 to 89 MPH (48 to 144 km/h)without keeping your foot on the acceleratorpedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push themain switch on. The indicator light on theswitch will come on.

To set at cruising speed, accelerate yourvehicle to the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it. (TheCRUISE light will come on.) Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will main-tain the set speed.

O To pass another vehicle, depress theaccelerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle will return to the previ-ously set speed.

O The vehicle may not maintain the set speedwhen going up or down steep hills. If thishappens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, follow eitherof these three methods:

a) Push the CANCEL switch; The CRUISElight will go out.

b) Tap the brake pedal; The CRUISE light willgo out.

c) Turn the main switch off. Both the ONindicator and CRUISE lights will go out.

O If you depress the brake pedal whilepushing the RES/ACCEL set switch andreset at the cruising speed, turn the mainswitch off once and then turn it on again.

O The cruise control will automatically becancelled if the vehicle slows down belowapproximately 8 MPH (13 km/h).

O Depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-mission), or move the selector lever to N

SIS0032

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-16

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 150: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

(Neutral) position (automatic transmis-sion). The CRUISE light will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, useone of the following three methods:

a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push andrelease the COAST/SET switch.

b) Push and hold the RES/ACCEL set switch.When the vehicle attains the speed youdesire, release the switch.

c) Push, then quickly release the RES/ACCELset switch. Each time you do this, the setspeed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, useone of the following three methods:

a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

b) Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.

Release the switch when the vehicle slowsdown to the desired speed.

c) Push, then quickly release the COAST/SETswitch. Each time you do this, the setspeed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push andrelease the RES/ACCEL set switch. The ve-hicle will resume the last set cruising speedwhen the vehicle speed is over 30 MPH (48km/h).

BREAK-IN SCHEDULEDuring the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km), followthese recommendations for the future reliabil-ity and economy of your new vehicle. Failureto follow these recommendations may resultin vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

O Do not drive over 55 MPH (90 km/h) anddo not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.Avoid driving for long periods at constant

speed, either fast or slow.

O Do not accelerate at full throttle in anygear.

O Avoid quick starts.

O Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

O Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(800 km).

INCREASING FUELECONOMYO Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain

cruising speeds with a constant acceleratorposition.

O Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.Driving at high speed will lower fueleconomy.

O Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.Maintain a safe distance behind othervehicles.

O Use a proper gear range which suits road

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-17

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 151: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

conditions. On level roads, shift into highgear as soon as possible.

O Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

O Keep your engine tuned up.

O Follow the recommended periodic mainte-nance schedule.

O Keep the tires inflated at the correct pres-sure. Low pressure will increase tire wearand waste fuel.

O Keep the front wheels in correct alignment.Improper alignment will cause not only tirewear but also lower fuel economy.

O Air conditioner operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner onlywhen necessary.

O When cruising at highway speeds, it ismore economical to use the air conditionerand leave the windows closed to reducedrag.

PARKING/PARKING ONHILLS

WARNING

O Do not park the vehicle over flam-mable materials such as drygrass, waste paper or rags. Theymay ignite and cause a fire.

O Never leave the engine running

while the vehicle is unattended.

O Never leave children unattendedin the vehicle.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission models:

ISD001

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-18

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 152: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Move the selector lever to the P (Park)position.

Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse)position. When parking on an uphill grade,place the shift lever in the 1 (Low gear)position.

WARNING

O Safe parking procedures requirethat both the parking brake be setand the transmission placed intoP (Park) for automatic transmis-sion models or in appropriategear for manual transmissionmodels. Failure to do so couldcause the vehicle to move unex-pectedly or roll away and result inan accident.

O Make sure the automatic trans-mission selector lever has beenpushed as far forward as it can goand cannot be moved without de-pressing the button at the end ofthe lever.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rollinginto the street when parked on a slopingdrive way, it is a good practice to turn thewheels as illustrated.

O HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: j1

Turn the wheels into the curb and movethe vehicle forward until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

O HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: j2

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

O HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: j3

Turn the wheels toward the side of the roadso the vehicle will move away from thecenter of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove the key.

POWER STEERINGThe power assisted steering is designed touse a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, toassist steering.

If the engine stops or drive belt breaks, youwill still have control of the vehicle. However,much greater steering effort is needed, espe-cially in sharp turns or at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-19

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 153: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

turned off while driving, the powerassist for the steering will not work.Steering will be much harder to op-erate.

BRAKE SYSTEMThe brake system has two separate hydrauliccircuits. If one circuit develops a problem, youwill still have braking at two wheels.

Vacuum assisted brake

The brake booster aids braking by usingengine vacuum. If the engine stops, you canstop the vehicle by depressing the brakepedal. However, greater foot pressure on thebrake pedal will be required to stop the vehicleand the stopping distance will be longer.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven throughwater, the brakes may get wet. As a result,

your braking distance will be longer and thevehicle may pull to one side during braking.To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speedwhile lightly pressing the brake pedal toheat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakesreturn to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle athigh speeds until the brakes function cor-rectly.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedalwhile driving. This will overheat the brakes,wear out the brake linings and pads faster andreduce gas mileage.To help save the brakes and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speed anddownshift to a lower gear before going downa slope or long grade. Overheated brakes mayreduce braking performance and could resultin loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

O While driving on a slippery sur-face, be careful when braking,accelerating or downshifting.Abrupt braking or acceleratingcould cause the wheels to skidand result in an accident.

O If the engine is not running or isturned off while driving, thepower assist for the brakes willnot work. Braking will be harder.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(ABS)

The anti-lock brake system controls the brakesat each wheel so the wheels will not lock whenbraking abruptly or when braking on slipperysurfaces. The system detects the rotationspeed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-20

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 154: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

pressure to prevent each wheel from lockingand sliding. By preventing wheel lockup, thesystem helps the driver maintain steeringcontrol and helps to minimize swerving andspinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the systemDepress the brake pedal and hold it down.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doingso may result in increased stoppingdistances.

Normal operationThe anti-lock brake system will not operate atspeeds below 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h) tocompletely stop the vehicle. (The speeds willvary according to road conditions.) When theanti-lock system senses that one or morewheels are close to locking up, the actuator

(under the hood) rapidly applies and releaseshydraulic pressure (like pumping the brakesvery quickly). While the actuator is working,you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedaland hear a noise or vibration from the actuatorunder the hood. This is normal and indicatesthat the anti-lock system is working properly.However, the pulsation may indicate that roadconditions are hazardous and extra care isrequired while driving.

Self-test featureThe anti-lock brake system consists of elec-tronic sensors, electric pumps, and hydraulicsolenoids controlled by a computer. Thecomputer has a built-in diagnostic feature thattests the system each time you start the engineand move the vehicle at a low speed inforward or reverse. When the self-test occurs,you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel apulsation in the brake pedal. This is normaland is not an indication of any malfunction. Ifthe computer senses any malfunction, it

switches the anti-lock brake system OFF andturns on the ABS warning light in the dash-board. The brake system will then behavenormally, but without anti-lock assistance.

If the light comes on during the self check, orwhile you are driving, you should take yourvehicle to your INFINITI dealer for repair atyour earliest convenience.

WARNING

The anti-lock brake system is a so-phisticated device, but it cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from care-less or dangerous drivingtechniques. It can help maintain ve-hicle control during braking on slip-pery surfaces, but remember that thestopping distance on slippery sur-faces will be longer than on normal

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-21

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 155: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

surfaces, even with the anti-locksystem. Stopping distances mayalso be longer on rough, gravel orsnow covered roads, or if you areusing tire chains. Always maintain asafe distance from the vehicle infront of you. Ultimately, the respon-sibility for safety of self and othersrests in the hands of the driver.

Tire type and condition of tires mayalso affect braking effectiveness.

O When replacing tires, install thespecified size of tires on all fourwheels.

O When installing a spare tire, makesure it is the proper size and typeas specified on the tire placard.See ‘‘Vehicle identification’’ in the‘‘10. Technical and consumer

information’’ section for tire plac-ard location.

TRACTION CONTROL SYS-TEM (if so equipped)On slippery surfaces such as wet asphaltroads, vehicle wheels may spin when thevehicle is accelerated. This wheel spin re-duces acceleration, or causes the vehicle toswerve, thus decreasing vehicle stability.

The traction control system helps limit wheelspin on slippery roads. The system operatesonly if it senses one or both of the frontwheels spinning or beginning to lose traction.When this happens, the system reduces en-gine power and may also upshift the trans-mission to help limit wheel spin.

O Indicator lightIf a malfunction occurs in the tractioncontrol system, the SLIP and indi-

cator lights come on in the meter panel.As long as these warning lights are on, thetraction control function is canceled. Thevehicle will behaves like a model withoutthe traction control system.

CAUTION

O The traction control system ismost effective when the transmis-sion gear selector is in the Dposition.

O If you drive in gear 1 or 2 with theTCS on, this could cause the threeway catalyst to overheat and bedamaged. To avoid this, the TCSwill automatically turn off. Shift-ing the gear selector to D willreactivate the TCS.

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-22

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 156: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

WARNING

This system is designed to preventthe wheels from spinning. However,it does not prevent vehicle slippingor spinning due to abrupt steeringoperation at high speeds or by care-less or dangerous driving tech-niques. Be especially careful whendriving on slippery surfaces and al-ways drive safely.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

FREEING A FROZEN DOORLOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, applyde-icer or glycerin to it through the key hole.If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key beforeinserting it into the key hole.

ANTI-FREEZEIn the winter when it is anticipated that thetemperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),check anti-freeze (ethylene glycol base) toassure proper winter protection. For additionalinformation, see ‘‘Engine cooling system’’ inthe ‘‘8. Do-it-yourself’’ section.

BATTERYIf the battery is not fully charged duringextremely cold weather conditions, the batteryfluid may freeze and damage the battery. Tomaintain maximum efficiency, the batteryshould be checked regularly. For additionalinformation, see ‘‘Battery’’ in the ‘‘8. Do-it-yourself’’ section.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WA-TERIf the vehicle is to be left outside withoutanti-freeze, drain the cooling system by open-ing the drain valves located under the radiatorand on the engine block. Refill before operat-

ing the vehicle. See ‘‘Engine cooling system’’in the ‘‘8. Do-it-yourself’’ section for changingengine coolant.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design toprovide superior performance on dry pave-ment. However, the performance of thesetires will be substantially reduced in snowyand icy conditions. If you operate yourvehicle on snowy or icy roads, INFINITIrecommends the use of MUD & SNOW orALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.Please consult your INFINITI dealer for thetire type, size, speed rating and availabilityinformation.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, stud-ded tires may be used. However, someprovinces and states prohibit their use.Check local, state and provincial lawsbefore installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of stud-

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-23

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 157: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

ded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces,may be poorer than that of non-studdedsnow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used if desired. Makesure they are of proper size for the tires onyour vehicle and are installed according tothe chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Useof tire chains may be prohibited accordingto location. Check the local laws beforeinstalling tire chains. When installing tirechains, make sure they are of proper sizefor the tires on your vehicle and areinstalled according to the chain manufac-turer’s suggestions. Use only SAE ClassS chains. Other types may damage yourvehicle. Use chain tensioners when rec-ommended by the tire chain manufacturerto ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of thetire chain must be secured or removed toprevent the possibility of whipping actiondamage to the fenders or underbody. Ifpossible, avoid fully loading your vehicle

when using tire chains. In addition, driveat a reduced speed. Otherwise, your ve-hicle may be damaged and/or vehiclehandling and performance may be ad-versely affected.

Never install tire chains on a T-type sparetire. Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items becarried in the vehicle during winter:

O a scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-move ice and snow from the windows andwiper blades.

O a sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

O a shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-drifts.

O extra window washer fluid to refill thereservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

O Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezingrain), very cold snow or ice canbe slick and very hard to drive on.The vehicle will have a lot lesstraction or grip under these con-ditions. Try to avoid driving onwet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

O Whatever the condition, drivewith caution. Accelerate and slowdown with care. If accelerating ordownshifting too fast, the drivewheels will lose even more trac-tion.

O Allow more stopping distance un-der these conditions. Braking

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-24

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 158: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

should be started sooner than ondry pavement.

O Allow greater following distanceson slippery roads.

O Watch for slippery spots (glareice). These may appear on anotherwise clear road in shadedareas. If a patch of ice is seenahead, brake before reaching it.Try not to brake while actually onthe ice, and avoid any suddensteering maneuvers.

O Do not use cruise control on slip-pery roads.

O Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keepsnow clear of the exhaust pipeand from around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER(if so equipped)An engine block heater to assist extreme coldtemperature starting is available through yourINFINITI dealer.

WARNING

Do not use your heater with an un-grounded electrical system or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. You canbe injured by an electrical shock ifyou use an ungrounded connection.

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-25

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 159: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual
Page 160: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Roadside assistance program ..................... 6-2Flat tire ........................................................ 6-2Changing a flat tire...................................... 6-2Jump starting .............................................. 6-7Push starting ............................................. 6-10

If your vehicle overheats........................... 6-10Towing your vehicle .................................. 6-12Towing recommended by INFINITI ........... 6-13Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuckvehicle) ...................................................... 6-14

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 161: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCEPROGRAMEvery new INFINITI comes with a 4 year,unlimited mileage Roadside Assistance plan.In the event of a roadside emergency, Road-side Assistance Service is available to you.Please refer to your Warranty Booklet fordetails. Both the Warranty Booklet and Road-side Assistance Calling Card in your Owner’sLiterature Portfolio provide the Toll-Free Num-ber to call for assistance. Roadside Assistanceis provided 24 hours a day, 365 days a year,for four years from the date sold to giveemergency roadside help, in the event ofmechanical or nonmechanical trouble(s) suchas flat tires, out-of-gas, dead battery, lost keysmechanical breakdown, accident, etc.

FLAT TIRE

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructionsbelow.

Stopping the vehicle1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away

from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply theparking brake. Shift the manual transmis-sion into the R (Reverse) position (auto-matic transmission in the P (Park) posi-tion).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and tosignal professional road assistance per-sonnel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicleand stand in a safe place, away from traffic

and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

O Make sure that the parking brakeis securely applied and themanual transmission is shiftedinto R (Reverse), or the automatictransmission into P (Park).

O Never change tires when the ve-hicle is on a slope, ice or slipperyareas. This is hazardous.

O Never change tires if oncomingtraffic is close to your vehicle.Wait for professional roadassistance.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

6-2

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 162: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks at both the front andback of the wheel diagonally opposite the flattire to prevent the vehicle from rolling when itis jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as thevehicle may move and could causepersonal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools

ICE001

SIE0003

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

6-3

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 163: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Remove jacking tools and spare tire from thestorage area located inside the trunk asillustrated.

Jacking up vehicle and removingthe damaged tire

Carefully read the caution label at-tached to the jack body and the follow-ing instructions.

SIE0004

SIE0006

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

6-4

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 164: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated above so that top of thejack contacts the vehicle at the jack uppoint. Align the jack head between the twonotches in the front or the rear as shown.Also fit the groove of the jack headbetween the notches as shown.

The jack should be used on level firmground.

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns byturning counterclockwise with the wheelnut wrench. Do not remove the wheelnuts until the tire is off the ground.

3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tireclears the ground. To lift the vehicle,securely hold the jack lever and rod withboth hands as shown above. Remove thewheel nuts, and then remove the tire.

WARNING

O Never get under the vehicle whileit is supported only by the jack.

O Use only the jack provided withyour vehicle. Do not use the jackprovided with your vehicle onother vehicles.The jack is designed only for lift-ing your vehicle during a tirechange.

O Use the correct jack up points;never use any other part of thevehicle for jack support.

O Never jack up the vehicle morethan necessary.

O Never use blocks on or under thejack.

SIE0001

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

6-5

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 165: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

O Do not start or run engine whilevehicle is on the jack, as it maycause the vehicle to move. This isespecially true for vehicle withlimited slip differential carrier.

O Do not allow passengers to stayin the vehicle while it is on thejack.

Installing the spare tire

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surfacebetween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the wheel on and tighten thewheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheelnuts alternately and evenly until they aretight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with the wheelnut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts se-curely in the sequence as illustrated.

WARNING

O Incorrect wheel nuts or improp-erly tightened wheel nuts cancause the wheel to become looseor come off. This could cause anaccident.

O Do not use oil or grease on thewheel studs or nuts. This couldcause the nuts to become loose.

As soon as possible tighten the wheelnuts to the specified torque with atorque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

72 to 87 ft-lb(98 to 118 Nzm)

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres-sure.

COLD pressure:

After vehicle has been parked for threehours or more or driven less than 1 mile(1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on theICE006M

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

6-6

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 166: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

tire placard affixed to the center con-sole lid.

Retighten the wheel nuts when thevehicle has been run for 600 miles(1,000 km) after installing the alumi-num wheel.

Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel, ensuringthe wheel nuts are correctly aligned with theholes in the cap. Forcing the cap on maycause it to be deformed.

Stowing the damaged tire andtools

Securely store the damaged tire and jackingequipment in the vehicle.

WARNING

O Always make sure that the sparetire and jacking equipment areproperly secured after use. Suchitems can become dangerous pro-

jectiles in an accident or suddenstop.

O The T-type spare tire and smallsize spare tire are designed foremergency use. See ‘‘Tires andwheels’’ in the ‘‘8. Do-it-yourself’’ section.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is available.Please see your Warranty Booklet or RoadsideAssistance I.D. Card for the toll-free numberto call.

JUMP STARTINGTo start your engine with a booster battery, theinstructions and precautions below must befollowed.

SIE0008

SIE0007

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

6-7

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 167: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

WARNING

O If done incorrectly, jump startingcan lead to a battery explosion,resulting in severe injury ordeath. It could also damage yourvehicle.

O Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the bat-tery. Keep all sparks and flamesaway from the battery.

O Do not allow battery fluid to comeinto contact with eyes, skin, clothor painted surfaces. Battery fluidis a corrosive sulphuric acid so-lution which can cause severeburns. If the fluid should comeinto contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted area

with water.

O Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

O The booster battery must be ratedat 12 volts. Use of an improperlyrated battery can damage yourvehicle.

O Whenever working on or near abattery, always wear suitable eyeprotectors (For example, gogglesor industrial safety spectacles)and remove rings, metal bands,or any other jewelry. Do not leanover the battery when jump start-ing.

O Do not attempt to jump start afrozen battery. It could explodeand cause serious injury.

O Your vehicle has an automaticengine cooling fan. It could comeon at any time. Keep hands andother objects away from it.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is available.Please see your Warranty Information Bookletor Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for thetoll-free number to call.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

6-8

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 168: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

WARNING

Always follow the instructions be-low. Failure to do so could result indamage to the charging system and

cause personal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,position the two vehicles to bring theirbatteries into close proximity to eachother.

Do not allow the two vehicles totouch.

2. Apply parking brake. Move the shift leverto the N (Neutral) position (On automatictransmission models, move the selectorlever to the P (Park) position). Switch offall unnecessary electrical systems (light,heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with an oldcloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence asillustrated.

CAUTION

O Always connect positive (+) topositive (+) and negative (−) tobody ground (For example, strutmounting bolt, etc. — not to the

SIE0034

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

6-9

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 169: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

battery).

O Make sure that cables do nottouch moving parts in the enginecompartment and that clamps donot contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the other vehicle and letit run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the other vehicleat about 2,000 rpm, and start your enginein the normal manner.

CAUTION

Do not keep starter motor engagedfor more than 10 seconds. If theengine does not start right away,turn the key off and wait 3 to 4seconds before trying again.

7. After starting your engine, carefully dis-connect the negative cable and then thepositive cable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Besure to dispose of the cloth used to coverthe vent holes as it may be contaminatedwith corrosive acid.

PUSH STARTING

CAUTION

O Automatic transmission modelscannot be push started. This maycause transmission damage.

O Three way catalyst equippedmodels should not be started bypushing since the three way cata-lyst may be damaged.

O Never try to start the vehicle bytowing it; when the engine starts,the forward surge could cause thevehicle to collide with the towvehicle.

If needed Roadside Assistance is available.Please see your Warranty Information Bookletor Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for thetoll-free number to call.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVER-HEATS

WARNING

O Do not continue to drive if yourvehicle overheats. Doing so couldcause a vehicle fire.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

6-10

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 170: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

O To avoid the danger of beingscalded, never remove the radia-tor cap while the engine is stillhot. When the radiator cap isremoved, pressurized hot waterwill spurt out, possibly causingserious injury.

O Do not open the hood if steam iscoming out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by anextremely high temperature gauge reading), orif you feel a lack of engine power, detectabnormal noise, etc., take the following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, applythe parking brake and move the shift leverto the N (Neutral) position (automatictransmission to the P (Park) position).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner switch. Openall the windows, move the heater or airconditioner temperature control to maxi-mum hot and fan control to high speed.

3. If engine overheating is caused by climb-ing a long hill on a hot day, run the engineat a fast idle (approximately 1,500 rpm)until the temperature gauge indication re-turns to normal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the radia-tor before opening the hood. Wait until nosteam or coolant can be seen beforeproceeding.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the

engine, stand clear to prevent get-ting burned.

6. Visually check if the cooling fan is run-ning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant is leakingor the cooling fan does not run, stop theengine.

WARNING

O Be careful not to allow yourhands, hair, jewelry or clothing tocome into contact with, or to getcaught in the cooling fan, or drivebelt.

O The fan motor can start at anytime when the coolant tempera-ture is high.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

6-11

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 171: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

7. After the engine cools down, check thecoolant level in the reservoir tank with theengine running. Add coolant to the reser-voir tank if necessary. Have your vehiclerepaired at the nearest INFINITI dealer.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is available.Please see your Warranty Information Bookletor Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for thetoll-free number to call.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLEWhen towing your vehicle, all State (Provin-cial in Canada) and local regulations fortowing must be followed. Incorrect towingequipment could damage your vehicle. Tow-ing instructions are available from yourINFINITI dealer. Local service operators aregenerally familiar with the applicable laws andprocedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damage toyour vehicle, INFINITI recommends having aservice operator tow your vehicle. It is advis-

able to have the service operator carefully readthe following precautions.

WARNING

O Never ride in a vehicle that isbeing towed.

O Never get under your vehicle afterit has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

O When towing, make sure that thetransmission, axles, steering sys-tem, and powertrain are in work-ing condition. If any unit is dam-aged, dollies must be used.

O Always attach safety chains be-fore towing.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is available.Please see your Warranty Information Bookletor Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for thetoll-free number to call.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

6-12

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 172: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

TOWING RECOMMENDED BYINFINITI

INFINITI recommends that your vehicle be

towed with the driving (front) wheels off theground as illustrated.

CAUTION

O Always release the parking brakewhen towing with the rear wheelson the ground.

O When towing manual transmis-sion models with the front wheelson the ground (If you do not use atowing dolly):Turn the ignition key to the OFFposition, and secure the steeringwheel in the straight-ahead posi-tion with a rope or similar device.Never place the ignition key in theLOCK position. This will result indamage to the steering lockmechanism.

Move the shift lever to the N(Neutral) position.

SIE0036

SIE0035

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

6-13

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 173: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

CAUTION

O Never tow automatic transmis-sion models with the front wheelson the ground as this may causeserious and expensive damage tothe transmission. If it is neces-sary to tow the vehicle with therear wheels raised, always usetowing dollies under the frontwheels.

O Never tow an automatic transmis-sion model from the rear (that is,backward) with four wheels onthe ground as this may causeserious and expensive damage tothe transmission.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing astuck vehicle)O Tow chains or cables must be attached

only to the main structural members of thevehicle.

O Pulling devices should be routed so theydo not touch any part of the suspension,steering, brake or cooling systems.

O Always pull the cable straight out from thefront or rear of the vehicle. Never pull onthe vehicle at an angle.

O Pulling devices such as ropes or canvasstraps are not recommended for use invehicle towing or recovery.

O Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

WARNING

Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explodeand result in serious injury. Parts ofyour vehicle could also overheat andbe damaged.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

6-14

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 174: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

7 APPEARANCE AND CARE

Cleaning exterior.......................................... 7-2Washing....................................................... 7-2Waxing......................................................... 7-3Removing spots .......................................... 7-3Underbody ................................................... 7-3Glass............................................................ 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels ............................... 7-4Chrome parts............................................... 7-4Cleaning interior .......................................... 7-4

Floor mats ................................................... 7-4Seat belts..................................................... 7-5Corrosion protection.................................... 7-5Most common factors contributing to vehiclecorrosion ..................................................... 7-5Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion ..................................................... 7-5To protect your vehicle from corrosion ...... 7-6

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 175: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

CLEANING EXTERIORIn order to maintain the appearance of yourvehicle, it is important to take proper care ofit.

In the following cases, please wash yourvehicle as soon as possible to protect thepaint surface.

O After a rainfall to prevent possible damagefrom acid rain

O After driving on coastal roads

O When things such as soot, bird droppings,tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on thepaint surface

O When dust or mud builds up on thesurface

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicleinside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in

a shady area or protect the vehicle with a bodycover.

Be careful not to scratch the paintsurface when putting on or removingthe body cover.

WASHING

Thoroughly rinse surface dirt off the vehiclewith a wet sponge and plenty of clean water.Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mildsoap such as NISSAN Car Wash, or a generalpurpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean,lukewarm (never hot) water. Rinse the vehicleagain with plenty of clean water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,hatches and hood are particularly vulnerableto the effects of road salt. Therefore, theseareas must be regularly cleaned. Make surethat the drain holes in the lower edge of thedoor are open. Spray water under the bodyand in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt andwash away road salt.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surfaceby using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.

CAUTION

O Do not use strong householdsoap, strong chemical deter-gents, gasoline or solvents.

O Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight or while the vehicle bodyis hot, as the surface may be-come water-spotted.

O Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts.Care must be taken when remov-ing caked-on dirt or other foreignsubstances so that the paint sur-face is not scratched or damaged.

APPEARANCE AND CARE

7-2

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 176: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

WAXINGIf you wish to wax your vehicle, only use a waxspecified for use over clear coats, such asNISSAN Liquid or Spray Wax, because yourINFINITI has been finished with the finest paintand hard clear coats. Your INFINITI dealer canassist you in choosing the proper product.

O Wax your vehicle only after a thoroughwashing. Follow the instructions suppliedwith the wax.

O Do not use a wax containing any abra-sives, cutting compounds or cleaners thatmay damage the vehicle finish.

O If the surface does not polish easily, use aroad tar remover and wax again.

Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a base coat/clear coatpaint finish may dull the finish or leaveswirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTSRemove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,insects, and tree sap as quickly as possiblefrom the paint surface to avoid lasting damageor staining. Special cleaning products areavailable at your INFINITI dealer or automotiveaccessory stores.

UNDERBODYIn areas where road salt is used in winter, theunderbody must be cleaned regularly. Thiswill prevent dirt and salt from building up andcausing underbody and suspension corrosion.Before the winter period and again in thespring, the underseal must be checked and, ifnecessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dustfilm from the glass surfaces. It is normal forglass to become coated with a film after thevehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleanerand a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

SIA0008A

APPEARANCE AND CARE

7-3

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 177: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of thewindow, do not use sharp-edgedtools, abrasive cleaners or chlorinebased disinfectant cleaners. Theycould damage the rear window de-fogger.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELSWash regularly, especially during wintermonths in areas where road salt is used. Saltcould discolor the wheel if not removed.

CHROME PARTSClean chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

CLEANING INTERIOROccasionally remove loose dust from theinterior trim, plastic parts and seats using a

vacuum cleaner or soft brush.

When interior trim or seats are stained, cleanimmediately as follows:

O wipe clean using a clean, soft damp clothand a neutral detergent. Wipe off all tracesof the detergent with another clean softdamp cloth, finishing with a soft dry cloth.

O if the above method does not remove thestains, etc., rub the affected area using asoft wet brush and a neutral detergent.Wipe off all traces of the detergent with aclean soft damp cloth, finishing with a softdry cloth.

Before using any fabric protector, read themanufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabricprotectors contain chemicals that may stain orbleach the seat material.

INFINITI offers vinyl and leather cleaner formore difficult stains or soiled surfaces. Seeyour INFINITI dealer for assistance in choos-ing the proper product.

CAUTION

O Never use benzine, thinner, orany similar solvents.

O The leather seats should be regu-larly coated with a leather waxlike saddle soap. Never use carwax.

O Never use fabric protectors un-less recommended by the manu-facturer.

FLOOR MATS

The use of genuine floor mats can extend thelife of your vehicle carpet and make it easier toclean the interior.

No matter what mats are used, be surethey are fitted for your vehicle and areproperly positioned in the footwell to

APPEARANCE AND CARE

7-4

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 178: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

prevent interference with pedal opera-tion.

Mats should be maintained with regular clean-ing and replaced if they become excessivelyworn.

Floor mat positioning aid (Driverside only)

Your INFINITI model includes a front floor matbracket to act as a floor mat positioning aid.INFINITI floor mats have been specially de-signed for your vehicle model. The driver’s

side floor mat has a grommet hole incorpo-rated in it. Simply position the mat by placingthe floor mat bracket through the floor matgrommet hole while centering the mat in thefloorpan contour.

Periodically check to make certain that themats are properly positioned.

SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wiping themwith a sponge dampened in a mild soapsolution. Allow the belts to dry completelybefore using them.

WARNING

Do not allow wet belts to roll up inthe retractor. Never use bleach, dye,or chemical solvents since thesemay severely weaken the seat beltwebbing.

CORROSION PROTECTION

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

O The accumulation of moisture-retainingdirt and debris in body panel sections,cavities, and other areas.

O Damage to paint and other protectivecoatings caused by gravel and stone chipsor minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OF COR-ROSION

MoistureAccumulation of sand, dirt and water on thevehicle body underside can accelerate corro-sion. Wet floor coverings will not dry com-pletely inside the vehicle, and should beremoved for drying to avoid floor panelcorrosion.

SIA0004

APPEARANCE AND CARE

7-5

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 179: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Relative humidityCorrosion will be accelerated in areas of highrelative humidity, especially those areas wherethe temperatures stay above freezing whereatmospheric pollution exists, or where roadsalt is used.

TemperatureA temperature increase will accelerate the rateof corrosion to those parts which are not wellventilated.

Air pollutionIndustrial pollution, the presence of salt in theair in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use willaccelerate the corrosion process. Road saltwill also accelerate the disintegration of paintsurfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLEFROM CORROSION

O Wash your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

O Always check for minor damage to thepaint and repair it as soon as possible.

O Keep drain holes at the bottom of thedoors open to avoid water accumulation.

O Check the underbody for accumulation ofsand, dirt or salt. If present, wash withwater as soon as possible.

CAUTION

O Never remove dirt, sand or otherdebris from the passenger com-partment by washing it out with ahose. Remove dirt with a vacuumcleaner or broom.

O Never allow water or other liquidsto come in contact with electroniccomponents inside the vehicle asthis may damage them.

O See your INFINITI dealer for assis-tance.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing areextremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosionand deterioration of underbody componentssuch as the exhaust system, fuel and brakelines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must becleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust andcorrosion, which may be required in someareas, consult your local INFINITI dealer.

APPEARANCE AND CARE

7-6

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 180: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

8 DO-IT-YOURSELF

Maintenance precautions............................. 8-2Engine compartment check locations ......... 8-4Engine cooling system ................................ 8-5Checking engine coolant level ..................... 8-5Changing engine coolant............................. 8-6Engine oil..................................................... 8-7Checking engine oil level............................. 8-7Changing engine oil..................................... 8-8Changing engine oil filter ............................ 8-9Automatic transmission fluid .................... 8-10Temperature conditions for checking........ 8-10Power steering fluid .................................. 8-12Brake and clutch fluid ............................... 8-12Window washer fluid................................. 8-13Battery ....................................................... 8-13Drive belts ................................................. 8-15Spark plugs ............................................... 8-15Replacing spark plugs............................... 8-16Air cleaner ................................................. 8-17

Windshield wiper blades ........................... 8-18Cleaning..................................................... 8-18Replacing................................................... 8-19Parking brake and brake pedal.................. 8-20Checking parking brake............................. 8-20Checking brake pedal ................................ 8-20Brake booster ............................................ 8-21Clutch pedal............................................... 8-21Fuses ......................................................... 8-21Engine compartment ................................. 8-22Passenger compartment............................ 8-23Lights......................................................... 8-24Headlights.................................................. 8-25Exterior and interior lights ........................ 8-26Tires and wheels ....................................... 8-31Tire pressure ............................................. 8-31Types of tires ............................................ 8-32Tire chains................................................. 8-33Changing tires and wheels ........................ 8-34

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 181: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

MAINTENANCE PRECAU-TIONSWhen performing any inspection or mainte-nance work on your vehicle, always take careto prevent serious accidental injury to yourselfor damage to the vehicle. The following aregeneral precautions which should be closelyobserved.

WARNING

O Park the vehicle on a level surface,apply the parking brake securelyand block the wheels to prevent thevehicle from moving. For a manualtransmission, move the shift leverto N (Neutral). For an automatictransmission, move the selector le-ver to P (Park).

O Be sure the ignition key is OFF

or LOCK when performing anyparts replacement or repairs.

O Your vehicle is equipped with anautomatic engine cooling fan. Itmay come on at any time withoutwarning, even if the ignition keyis in the OFF position and theengine is not running. To avoidinjury, always disconnect thenegative battery cable beforeworking near the fan.

O If you must work with the enginerunning, keep your hands, clothing,hair and tools away from movingfans, belts and any other movingparts.

O It is advisable to remove necktieand any jewelry, such as rings,watches, etc. before working on

your vehicle.

O Always wear eye protectionwhenever you work on your ve-hicle.

O If you must run the engine in anenclosed space such as a garage,be sure there is proper ventilationfor exhaust gases.

O Never get under the vehicle whileit is supported only by a jack. If itis necessary to work under thevehicle, support it with safetystands.

O Keep smoking materials, flameand sparks away from fuel andthe battery.

O On gasoline engine models withthe Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI)

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-2

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 182: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

System, the fuel filter or fuellines should be serviced by aINFINITI dealer because the fuellines are under high pressureeven when the engine is off.

CAUTION

O Do not work under the hood whilethe engine is hot. Turn off theengine and wait until it coolsdown.

O Never connect or disconnect ei-ther the battery or any transistor-ized component connector whilethe ignition key is on.

O Never leave the engine or theautomatic transmission relatedcomponent harness connector

disconnected while the ignitionkey is on.

O Avoid direct contact with usedengine oil. Improperly disposedmotor oil and/or other vehicle flu-ids can hurt the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulationsfor disposal of vehicle fluid.

This ‘‘8. Do-it-yourself’’ section gives instruc-tions regarding only those items which arerelatively easy for an owner to perform.

You should be aware that incomplete orimproper servicing may result in operatingdifficulties or excessive emissions, and couldaffect your warranty coverage. If in doubtabout any servicing, have it done byyour INFINITI dealer.

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-3

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 183: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

SID0133

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-4

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 184: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEMThe engine cooling system is filled at thefactory with a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solu-tion contains rust and corrosion inhibitors,therefore additional cooling system additivesare not necessary.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant,be sure to use only a genuineNISSAN anti-freeze coolant orequivalent with the proper mixtureratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50%demineralized water/distilled water.The use of other types of coolantsolutions may damage your enginecooling system.

Outside temperaturedown to Anti-

freeze

Deminer-alizedwater/

distilledwater°C °F

−35 −30 50% 50%

WARNING

O Never remove the radiator capwhen the engine is hot. Seriousburns could be caused by highpressure fluid escaping from theradiator. Wait until the engineand radiator cool down.

O See ‘‘If your vehicle overheats’’in the ‘‘6. In case of emergency’’section.

O The radiator is equipped with apressure cap. Use only a genuinecap as a replacement.

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir tankwhen the engine is cold. If the coolant level isbelow MIN, add coolant up to the MAX level.If the reservoir tank is empty, check thecoolant level in the radiator when the en-gine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant inthe radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up tothe filler opening and also add it to thereservoir tank up to the MAX level.

SID0142

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-5

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 185: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked by your INFINITIdealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOL-ANT

O Major cooling system repairs should be

performed by your INFINITI dealer. Theservice procedures can be found in theappropriate INFINITI Service Manual.

O Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine overheat-ing.

WARNING

O To avoid the danger of beingscalded, never change the cool-ant when the engine is hot.

O Never remove the radiator capwhen the engine is hot. Seriousburns could be caused by highpressure fluid escaping from theradiator.

1. Open the radiator cap and drain plug.SID0019

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-6

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 186: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

2. Open the drain plug on the engine block.

3. Flush the cooling system by running freshwater through the radiator.

4. Close the radiator drain plug and the drainplug on the engine block securely.

5. See ‘‘Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants’’ in the ‘‘10. Technical andconsumer information’’ section for coolingsystem capacity. Fill the radiator slowlywith the proper mixture of coolant andwater. Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX

level. Then install the radiator cap.

6. Start the engine, and warm it up until theradiator fan operates. Then race the enginetwo or three times under no load. Watchthe coolant temperature gauge for signs ofoverheating.

7. Stop the engine. After it completely coolsdown, refill the radiator up to the filleropening. Fill the reservoir tank up to theMAX level.

8. Check the radiator drain plug and the drain

plug on the engine block for any sign ofleakage.

ENGINE OIL

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andapply parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operatingtemperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10

SID0020

SID0021

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-7

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 187: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check theoil level. It should be between the H and Lmarks. If the oil level is below the L mark,remove the oil filler cap and pour recom-mended oil through the opening. Do notoverfill.

6. Recheck oil level with dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the se-verity of operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regu-larly. Operating with insufficientamount of oil can damage the en-gine, and such damage is not cov-ered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andapply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operatingtemperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drainplug.

5. Remove the oil filler cap.

6. Remove the drain plug with a wrench andcompletely drain the oil.

If oil filter is to be changed, remove andreplace it at this time. See later in ‘‘Engineoil’’ for changing engine oil filter.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, asthe engine oil is hot.

SID0124

SID0023

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-8

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 188: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Waste oil must be disposed of properly.Check your local regulations.7. Clean and re-install the drain plug and

new washer. Securely tighten the drainplug with a wrench.

Drain plug tightening torque:

22 to 29 ft-lb(29 to 39 Nzm)

Do not use excessive force.8. Refill engine with recommended oil and

install the cap securely.

See ‘‘Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants’’ in the ‘‘10. Technical andconsumer information’’ section for drainand refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends onthe oil temperature and drain time. Usethese specifications for reference only.Always use the dipstick to determine whenthe proper amount of oil is in the engine.

9. Start the engine.

Check for leakage around the drain plug.Correct as required.

10.Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level with thedipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

11.Dispose of waste oil in the proper manner.

WARNING

O Prolonged and repeated contactwith used engine oil may causeskin cancer.

O Try to avoid direct skin contactwith used oil. If skin contact ismade, wash thoroughly with soapor hand cleaner as soon as pos-sible.

O Keep used engine oil out of reachof children.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FIL-TER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andapply the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filterwrench. (Depending on the engine model,a special cap type wrench may be re-quired. See your INFINITI dealer if indoubt.) Remove the oil filter by turning itby hand.

SID0024

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-9

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 189: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, asthe engine oil may be hot.

4. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surfacewith a clean rag.

Be sure to remove any old rubber gasketremaining on the mounting surface of theengine.

5. Coat the rubber gasket on the new filterwith clean engine oil.

6. Screw in the oil filter until a slight resis-tance is felt, then tighten additionally morethan 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:

10.85 to 15.19 ft-lb(14.7 to 20.6 Nzm)

7. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

8. Turn the engine off and wait severalminutes. Check the oil level. Add engineoil if necessary.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMIS-SION FLUID

WARNING

O When engine is running, keephands, jewelry and clothing awayfrom any moving parts such ascooling fan and drive belt.

O Automatic transmission fluid ispoisonous and should be storedcarefully in marked containersout of the reach of children.

TEMPERATURE CONDITIONSFOR CHECKING

O The fluid level should be checked usingthe HOT range on the dipstick after thefollowing conditions have been met:

a) the engine should be warmed up tooperating temperature.

b) the vehicle should be driven at least 5minutes.

c) the automatic transmission fluidshould be warmed to between 122and 176°F (50 and 80°C).

O The fluid can be checked at fluid tempera-tures of 86 to 122°F (30 to 50°C) usingthe COLD range on the dipstick after theengine is warmed up and before driving.However, the fluid should be re-checkedusing the HOT range.

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-10

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 190: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and setthe parking brake.

2. Start the engine and then move the selec-tor lever through each gear range. Movethe selector lever to the P (Park) positionafter you have moved it through all ranges.

3. Check the fluid level with the engineidling.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean withlint-free paper.

5. Reinsert the dipstick into the charging pipeas far as it will go.

6. Remove the dipstick and note the reading.If the level is at the low side of eitherrange, add fluid to the charging pipe.

CAUTION

O Do not overfill.

O Use only NISSAN Matic D (Conti-nental US and Alaska) or genuineautomatic transmission fluid(Canada). DexronTM III/MerconTM

or equivalent may also be used.Outside the continental US andAlaska contact an INFINITI dealerfor more information regardingsuitable fluids, including recom-mended brand(s) of DexronTM

III/MerconTM automatic transmis-sion fluid.

If the vehicle has been driven for a longtime at high speeds, or in city traffic inhot weather, or if it is being used to pulla trailer, the accurate fluid level cannot

SID0143 SID0055

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-11

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 191: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

be read. You should wait until the fluidhas cooled down (about 30 minutes).

POWER STEERING FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir tank.

The fluid level should be checked using theHOT range at fluid temperatures of 122 to176°F (50 to 80°C) or using the COLD rangeat fluid temperatures of 32 to 86°F (0 to30°C).

CAUTION

O Do not overfill.

O The recommended fluid is TypeDEXRON

TMIII or equivalent.

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If thefluid is below the MIN line or the brakewarning light comes on, add DOT 3 fluid up

to the MAX line. If fluid must be addedfrequently, the system should be thoroughlychecked by your INFINITI dealer.

WARNING

Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, orcontaminated fluid may damage thebrake and clutch systems. The use ofimproper fluids can damage thebrake system and affect the vehi-cle’s stopping ability.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on paintedsurfaces. This will damage thepaint. If fluid is spilled, wash withwater.

SID0027

SID0028

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-12

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 192: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

Type A:

Add fluid when the low washer fluid warninglight comes on. Add a washer solvent to thewater for better cleaning. In the winter season,add a windshield washer anti-freeze. Followthe manufacturer’s instructions for the mixtureratio.

Type B:

To check the fluid level, use your finger toplug the center hole of the cap (as shownabove), then remove it from the tank. If thereis no fluid in the tube, add fluid. Add a washersolvent to the water for better cleaning. In thewinter season, add a windshield washer anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor the mixture ratio.

WARNING

Anti-freeze is poisonous and shouldbe stored carefully in marked con-tainers out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for window washer solution.This may result in damage to thepaint.

BATTERYO Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any

corrosion should be washed off with asolution of baking soda and water.

O Make certain the terminal connections areclean and securely tightened.

SID0029

SID0057

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-13

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 193: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

O If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 daysor longer, disconnect the (—) negativebattery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

O Do not expose the battery toflames or electrical sparks. Hy-drogen gas generated by batteryaction is explosive. Do not allowbattery fluid to contact your skin,eyes, fabrics, or painted sur-faces. After touching a battery orbattery cap, do not touch or rubyour eyes. Thoroughly wash yourhands. If the acid contacts youreyes, skin or clothing, immedi-ately flush with water for at least15 minutes and seek medicalattention.

O When working on or near a bat-tery, always wear suitable eyeprotection and remove all jew-elry.

O Keep the battery out of the reachof children.

Check the fluid level in each cell. It should bebetween the MAX. and MIN. lines.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add only

distilled water to bring the level to theindicator in each filler opening. Do notoverfill.

1. Remove the cell plugs.

2. Add distilled water up to the MAX. level.

3. Tighten cell plugs.

If jump starting is necessary, see ‘‘Jumpstarting’’ in the ‘‘6. In case of emergency’’section. If the engine does not start by jumpstarting, the battery may have to be replaced.Contact your INFINITI dealer.

IDI096

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-14

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 194: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

DRIVE BELTS

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is OFF. Theengine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs ofunusual wear, cuts, fraying, oil adhesionor looseness. If the belt is in poor condi-tion or loose, have it replaced or adjusted

by your INFINITI dealer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for con-dition and tension in accordance with themaintenance schedule in this manual.

SPARK PLUGS

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignitionswitch are off and that the parkingbrake is engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct wrench toremove the plugs. An incorrectwrench can cause damage.

SID0031

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-15

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 195: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

1. Remove the rocker cover ornament using asuitable hexagon wrench. (Front side)

2. Disconnect the electrical connectors.

3. Loosen the ignition coil fixing bolts. Andremove the ignition coil to give access tothe spark plugs.

4. Remove the spark plugs with a spark plugwrench.

The plug wrench has a rubber seal thatholds the spark plug so that it will not fallwhen it is pulled out. Make sure that eachspark plug is snugly fitted into the plugwrench.

5. Fit the new plugs, one at a time, into thespark plug wrench and install them. Turneach plug in several full turns by hand,then tighten with a spark plug wrench tothe correct torque. Do not overtighten.

Spark plug tightening torque:

14 to 22 ft-lb(20 to 29 Nzm)

6. Holding the ignition coil, re-connect eachignition coil to its proper spark plug bypushing it on until you feel a snap.

7. Tighten all ignition coils.

SID0032

SID0033

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-16

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 196: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace the platinum-tipped spark plugs as frequently as the con-ventional type spark plugs since they will lastmuch longer. Follow the maintenance sched-ule but, do not reuse them by cleaning orregapping.

Always replace with recommendedplatinum-tipped spark plugs.

AIR CLEANER

The filter element should not be cleaned andreused. Replace it according to the mainte-nance intervals. See ‘‘Periodic maintenanceschedules’’ in the ‘‘9. Maintenance’’ section formaintenance intervals. When replacing thefilter, wipe the inside of the air cleanerhousing and the cover with a damp cloth.

SID0056

DI015M

Platinum-Tipped

Blue rings

SID0035

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-17

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 197: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

WARNING

O Operating the engine with the aircleaner off can cause you or oth-ers to be burned. The air cleanernot only cleans the air, it stopsflame if the engine backfires. If itis not there, and the engine back-fires, you could be burned. Do notdrive with it off, and be carefulworking on the engine with the aircleaner off.

O Never pour fuel into the throttlebody or attempt to start the en-gine with the air cleaner re-moved. Doing so could result inserious injury.

WINDSHIELD WIPERBLADESCLEANINGIf your windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer or if a wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax or other material may beon the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with awasher solution or a mild detergent. Yourwindshield is clean if beads do not form whenrinsing with clear water.

Clean the blade by wiping it with a clothsoaked in a washer solution or a mild deter-gent. Then rinse the blade with clear water. Ifyour windshield is still not clear after cleaningthe blades and using the wiper, replace theblades.

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-18

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 198: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

REPLACING

1. Pull the wiper arm.

2. Push the lock pin, then remove the wiperblade.

3. Insert the new wiper blade to the wiper armuntil a click sounds.

CAUTION

After wiper blade replacement, re-turn the wiper arm to its originalposition.

Otherwise it may be damaged whenthe engine hood is opened.

Make sure the wiper blade contacts

the glass, otherwise the arm may bedamaged from wind pressure.

If you wax the surface of the hood, becareful not to let wax get into thewasher nozzle. This may cause clog-

IDI021

SID0036

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-19

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 199: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

ging or improper windshield washeroperation. If wax gets into the nozzle,remove it with a needle or small pin.

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE PEDALCHECKING PARKING BRAKE

From the released position, pull the parkingbrake lever up slowly and firmly. If the numberof clicks is out of the range listed above, seeyour INFINITI dealer.

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the distancebetween the upper surface of the pedal and themetal floor. If it is out of the range shownabove, see your INFINITI dealer.

Self-adjusting brakesYour vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time thebrake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See your INFINITI dealer and have itchecked if the brake pedal heightdoes not return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle haveaudible wear indicators. When a brake padrequires replacement, it will make a highpitched scraping or screeching sound whenthe vehicle is in motion whether or not thebrake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the wearindicator sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions,occasional brake squeak, squeal or othernoise may be heard. Occasional brake noiseduring light to moderate stops is normal and

SID0037

IDI053-A

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-20

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 200: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

does not affect the function or performance ofthe brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervalsshould be followed. For additional infor-mation, see ‘‘Periodic maintenance schedules’’in the ‘‘9. Maintenance’’ section for mainte-nance intervals.

BRAKE BOOSTER

Check the brake booster function as follows:

1. With the engine off, press and release thebrake pedal several times. When brakepedal movement (distance of travel) re-mains the same from one pedal applicationto the next, continue on to the next step.

2. While depressing the brake pedal, start theengine. The pedal height should drop alittle.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop theengine. Keeping the pedal depressed for

about 30 seconds, the pedal height shouldnot change.

4. Run the engine for 1 minute withoutdepressing the brake pedal, then turn it off.Depress the brake pedal several times. Thepedal travel distance will decrease gradu-ally with each depression as the vacuum isreleased from the booster.

If the brakes do not operate properly, see yourINFINITI dealer.

CLUTCH PEDAL

Press the pedal by hand and be sure the freetravel is within the limits shown above. If freetravel is too little or too much, see yourINFINITI dealer.

FUSES

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of higher amperagerating than that specified on the fusebox cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

IDI054-A

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-21

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 201: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition key and headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fusible link cover.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a newfuse.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electri-cal system checked and repaired by yourINFINITI dealer.

Fusible links

If the electrical equipment does not operateand fuses are in good condition, check thefusible links. If any of these fusible links aremelted, replace only with genuine INFINITIparts.

SID0038

SID0040

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-22

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 202: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition key and headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the fuse box lid.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a newfuse.

5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electri-cal system checked and repaired by yourINFINITI dealer.

SID0039A

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-23

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 203: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

LIGHTS

SID0141

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-24

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 204: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

HEADLIGHTS

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam typewhich uses a replaceable headlight (halogen)bulb. A bulb can be replaced from inside theengine compartment without removing theheadlight assembly.

CAUTION

High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulbmay break if the glass envelope isscratched or the bulb is dropped.

Hold the plastic base when handlingthe bulb. Never touch the glass en-velope.

Replacing the headlight bulb

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector from

the rear end of the bulb.

3. Turn the bulb retaining ring counterclock-wise until it is free from the headlightreflector, then remove it.

4. Remove the headlight bulb. Do not shakeor rotate the bulb when removing it.

5. Insert the bulb into the headlight reflectorwith the flat side of the plastic base facingupward.

6. Install the bulb retaining ring and turn itclockwise until it stops.

7. Push the electrical connector into the bulbplastic base until it snaps and stops.

8. Connect the battery negative cable.

Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment innecessary, contact your INFINITIdealer.

CAUTION

O Do not touch the bulb.

O Use the same number and watt-age as originally installed:

Wattage 65/45

Bulb no. 9004

O Do not leave the bulb out of theheadlight reflector for a long pe-riod of time as dust, moisture,

SID0041

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-25

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 205: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

and smoke may enter the head-light body and affect the perfor-mance of the headlight.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIORLIGHTS

ItemWattage

(W)Bulb No.

Cornering light 27 1156

Front combination light

Turn signal/Clearance light 27/8 1157

Side marker light 3.8 194

Front fog light 55

Rear combination light

Turn signal 27 1156

Stop/Tail 27/8 1157

Back-up 27 1156

License plate light 5

High-mounted stop light 18 921

Interior light 10

Front personal light 10

Step light 2.7 161

Trunk light 3.4 158

Vanity mirror light 1.4

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-26

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 206: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.

When replacing a bulb, first remove the lensand/or cover.

IDI044M

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-27

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 207: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

SID0134

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-28

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 208: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

SID0045A

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-29

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 209: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

SID0135

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-30

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 210: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

TIRES AND WHEELSIf you have a flat tire, see ‘‘Flat tire’’ inthe ‘‘6. In case of emergency’’ section.

TIRE PRESSURE

Maximum inflation pressure

Do not exceed the maximum inflation pres-sures shown on the side wall of the tire.

Tire inflation pressurePeriodically check the tire pressure (includingspare). Incorrect tire pressure may adversely

SID0125

SID0136

SID0137

IDI002

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-31

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 211: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

affect tire life and vehicle handling. Tirepressure should be checked when tires areCOLD. Tires are considered COLD after thevehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours,or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tirepressures are shown on the tire placard affixedto the center console lid.

WARNING

O Improperly inflated tires can failsuddenly and cause an accident.

O The vehicle capacity weight isindicated on the tire placard. Donot load your vehicle beyond thiscapacity. Overloading your ve-hicle may result in reduced tirelife, unsafe operating conditionsdue to premature tire failure, or

unfavorable handling characteris-tics and could also lead to aserious accident. Loading beyondthe specified capacity may alsoresult in failure of other vehiclecomponents.

O Before taking a long trip, orwhenever you have loaded yourvehicle heavily, use a tire pres-sure gauge to ensure that the tirepressure is at the specified level.

O Do not drive your vehicle over 85MPH (140 km/h) unless it isequipped with high speed capa-bility tires. Driving faster than 85MPH (140 km/h) may result in tirefailure, loss of control and pos-sible injury.

TYPES OF TIRES

CAUTION

When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., summer, all season or snow) andconstruction. Your INFINITI dealer maybe able to help you with informationabout tire type, size, speed rating andavailability. Replacement tires mayhave a lower speed rating than thefactory equipped tires, and may notmatch the potential maximum vehiclespeed. Never exceed the maximumspeed rating of the tire.

All season tires

INFINITI specifies all season tires on somemodels to provide good performance for useall year around, including snowy and icy road

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-32

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 212: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

conditions. All season tires are identified byALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire side-wall. Snow tires have better snow traction thanall season tires and may be more appropriatein some areas.

Summer tiresINFINITI specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior performance ondry roads. Summer tire performance in snowand ice will be substantially reduced. Summertires do not have the tire traction rating M&Son the tire sidewall.

If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, INFINITI recommends the use ofsnow or all season tires on all four wheels.

Snow tiresIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary toselect tires equivalent in size and load ratingto the original equipment tires. If you do not,it can adversely affect the safety and handlingof your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires will have lower speedratings than factory equipped tires and maynot match the potential maximum vehiclespeed. Never exceed the maximum speedrating of the tire.

If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, INFINITI recommends the use ofsnow or all season tires on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some provincesand states prohibit their use. Check local,state and provincial laws before installingstudded tires. Skid and traction capabilities ofstudded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces,may be poorer than that of non-studded snowtires.

TIRE CHAINSUse of tire chains may be prohibited accord-ing to location. Check the local laws beforeinstalling tire chains. When installing tirechains, make sure they are of proper size for

the tires on your vehicle and are installedaccording to the chain manufacturer’s sugges-tions. Use only SAE class S chains. Othertypes may damage your vehicle. Use chaintensioners when recommended by the tirechain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Looseend links of the tire chain must be secured orremoved to prevent the possibility of whippingaction damage to the fenders or undercarriage.If possible, avoid fully loading your vehiclewhen using tire chains. In addition, drive at areduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle maybe damaged and/or vehicle handling andperformance may be adversely affected.

Never install tire chains on a T-type spare tire.Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-33

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 213: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

CHANGING TIRES ANDWHEELS

Tire rotation

INFINITI recommends that tires be rotatedevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Wheel nut tightening torque:

72 to 87 ft-lb (98 to 118 Nzm)

See ‘‘Flat tire’’ in the ‘‘6. In case of emergency’’section for tire replacing procedures.

WARNING

O After rotating the tires, adjust thetire pressure.

O Retighten the wheel nuts after thealuminum wheels have been runfor the first 600 miles (1,000 km)(also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

O Do not include the T-type sparetire or any other small size sparetire in the tire rotation.

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

O Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking, bulg-ing, or objects caught in thetread. If excessive wear, cracks,bulging, or deep cuts are found,

IDI069M

IDI004

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-34

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 214: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

the tire should be replaced.

O The original tires have a built-intread wear indicator. When thewear indicator is visible, the tireshould be replaced.

O Improper service for a T-typespare tire may result in seriouspersonal injury. If it is necessaryto repair the T-type spare tire,contact your INFINITI dealer.

Replacing tires and wheels

When replacing a tire, use the same size,speed rating and load carrying capacity asoriginally equipped. See ‘‘Specifications’’ inthe ‘‘10. Technical and consumer information’’section for recommended types and sizes oftires and wheels.

WARNING

O The use of tires other than thoserecommended or the mixed use oftires of different brands, con-struction (bias, bias-belted or ra-dial), or tread patterns can ad-versely affect the ride, braking,handling, ground clearance,body-to-tire clearance, tire chainclearance, speedometer calibra-tion, headlight aim and bumperheight. Some of these effects maylead to accidents and could resultin serious personal injury.

O If the wheels are changed for anyreason, always replace withwheels which have the same off-

set dimension. Wheels of a dif-ferent offset could cause earlytire wear, possibly degraded ve-hicle handling characteristicsand/or interference with the brakediscs. Such interference can leadto decreased braking efficiencyand/or early brake pad wear.

O Do not install a deformed wheelor tire even if it has been re-paired. Such wheels or tirescould have structural damage andcould fail without warning.

O The use of retread tire is notrecommended.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle han-dling and tire life. Even with regular use,wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-35

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 215: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be performedwith the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancingthe front wheels on the vehicle could lead totransmission damage.

Care of wheelsO Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

to maintain their appearance.

O Clean the inner side of the wheels whenthe wheel is changed or the underside ofthe vehicle is washed.

O Do not use abrasive cleaners when wash-ing the wheels.

O Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause loss ofpressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

O INFINITI recommends that the road wheelsbe waxed to protect against road salt inareas where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (T-type spare tire)

US only. Canadian vehicles are equipped witha full size spare tire.

Observe the following precautions if theT-type spare tire must be used, otherwise yourvehicle could be damaged or involved in anaccident.

CAUTION

O The T-type spare tire should beused only for emergency. Itshould be replaced by the stan-dard tire at the first opportunity.

O Drive carefully while the T-typespare tire is installed.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptbraking while driving.

O Periodically check the T-type

spare tire inflation pressure, andalways keep it at 60 psi (420 kPa,4.2 bar).

O Do not drive your vehicle atspeeds faster than 50 MPH (80km/h).

O Do not use tire chains on a T-typespare tire. Tire chains will not fitproperly on the T-type spare tireand may cause damage to thevehicle.

O When driving on roads coveredwith snow or ice, the T-type sparetire should be used on the rearwheel and the original tire usedon the front wheels (drivewheels). Use tire chains only onthe front two original tires.

O Tire tread of the T-type spare tire

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-36

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 216: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

will wear at a faster rate than theoriginal tire. Replace the T-typespare tire as soon as the treadwear indicators appear.

O Because the T-type spare tire issmaller than the original tire,ground clearance is reduced. Toavoid damage to the vehicle donot drive over obstacles. Also donot drive the vehicle through anautomatic car wash since it mayget caught.

O Do not use the T-type spare tireon other vehicles.

O Do not use more than one T-typespare tire at the same time.

O Do not tow a trailer while theT-type spare tire is installed.

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-37

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 217: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual
Page 218: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

9 MAINTENANCE

General maintenance ................................... 9-3Explanation of maintenance items .............. 9-3Periodic maintenance schedules ................. 9-6

Schedule 1................................................... 9-6Schedule 2................................................... 9-6Explanation of maintenance items ............ 9-11

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 219: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Your new INFINITI has been designed to haveminimum maintenance requirements withlonger service intervals to save you both timeand money. However, some day-to-day andregular maintenance is essential to maintainyour INFINITI’s good mechanical condition, aswell as its emission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make surethat the specified maintenance, as well asgeneral maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only onewho can ensure that your vehicle receives theproper maintenance care. You are a vital linkin the maintenance chain.

General maintenance:

General maintenance includes those itemswhich should be checked during normalday-to-day operation of the vehicle. They areessential if your vehicle is to continue tooperate properly. It is your responsibility to

perform these procedures regularly as pre-scribed.

These checks or inspections can be done byyourself, a qualified technician or, if youprefer, your INFINITI dealer.

Periodic maintenance:

The maintenance items listed in this part arerequired to be serviced at regular intervals.

However, under severe driving conditions,additional or more frequent maintenance willbe required.

Where to go for service:

If maintenance service is required or yourvehicle appears to malfunction, have thesystems checked and tuned by an authorizedINFINITI dealer.

INFINITI technicians are well-trained special-ists and are kept up to date with the latestservice information through technical bulle-tins, service tips, and in-dealership training

programs. They are completely qualified towork on INFINITI’s vehicles before they workon your vehicle, rather than after they haveworked on it.

You can be confident that your INFINITIdealer’s service department performs the bestjob to meet the maintenance requirements onyour vehicle — in a reliable and economicway.

MAINTENANCE

9-2

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 220: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

GENERAL MAINTENANCEDuring the normal day-to-day operation of thevehicle, general maintenance should be per-formed regularly as prescribed in this section.If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrationsor smell, be sure to check for the cause orhave your INFINITI dealer do it promptly. Inaddition, you should notify your INFINITIdealer if you think that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenancework, see ‘‘Maintenance precautions’’ in the‘‘8. Do-it-yourself’’ section.

EXPLANATION OF MAINTE-NANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with ‘‘*’’ is found in the ‘‘8.Do-it-yourself’’ section.

Outside the vehicleThe maintenance items listed here should beperformed from time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gaugeperiodically when at a service station, includ-ing the spare, and adjust to the specifiedpressure if necessary. Check carefully fordamage, cuts or excessive wear.

Wheel nuts*: When checking the tires, makesure no nuts are missing, and check for anyloose nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Wheel alignment and balance: If the

vehicle pulls to either side while driving on astraight and level road, or if you detect unevenor abnormal tire wear, there may be a need forwheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normalhighway speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check forcracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Doors and engine hood: Check that alldoors and the engine hood, operate smoothlyas well as the trunk lid or back hatch. Alsomake sure that all latches lock securely.Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that thesecondary latch keeps the hood from openingwhen the primary latch is released.

When driving in areas using road salt or othercorrosive materials, check lubrication fre-quently.

MAINTENANCE

9-3

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 221: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Inside the vehicleThe maintenance items listed here should bechecked on a regular basis, such as whenperforming periodic maintenance, cleaning thevehicle, etc.

Lights*: Make sure that the headlights, stoplights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and otherlights are all operating properly and installedsecurely. Also check headlight aim.

Warning lights and buzzers: Make surethat all warning lights and buzzers are oper-ating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Checkthat the wipers and washer operate properlyand that the wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster: Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properlyand in good quantity when operating theheater or air conditioner.

Steering wheel: Check that it has thespecified play. Be sure to check for changes inthe steering conditions, such as excessive freeplay, hard steering or strange noises.

Seats: Check seat position controls such asseat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensurethey operate smoothly and that all latches locksecurely in every position. Check that the headrestraints move up and down smoothly andthat the locks (if so equipped) hold securely inall latched positions.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seatbelt system (For example, buckles, anchors,adjusters and retractors) operate properly andsmoothly, and are installed securely. Checkthe belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear ordamage.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal forsmooth operation and make sure the pedaldoes not catch or require uneven effort. Keepthe floor mats away from the pedal.

Clutch pedal*: Make sure the pedal oper-ates smoothly and check that it has the properfree play.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull thevehicle to one side when applied.

Brake pedal and booster*: Check thepedal for smooth operation and make sure ithas the proper distance under it when de-pressed fully. Check the brake booster func-tion. Be sure to keep floor mats away from thepedal.

Parking brake*: Check that the lever has theproper travel and make sure that the vehicle isheld securely on a fairly steep hill when onlythe parking brake is applied.

Automatic transaxle P (Park) positionmechanism: On a fairly steep hill check thatthe vehicle is held securely with the selectorlever in the P (Park) position without applyingany brakes.

MAINTENANCE

9-4

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 222: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Under the hood and vehicleThe maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically (For example, each timeyou check the engine oil or refuel).

Windshield washer fluid*: Check thatthere is adequate fluid in the tank.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolantlevel when the engine is cold.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,etc., that may have accumulated. Make surethe hoses have no cracks, deformation, dete-rioration or loose connections.

Brake and clutch fluid levels*: Make surethat the brake and clutch fluid levels arebetween the MAX and MIN lines on thereservoir.

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. Itshould be between the MAX and MIN lines.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no beltis frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level on thedipstick after parking the vehicle on a levelspot and turning off the engine.

Power steering fluid level* and lines:Check the level in the reservoir tank with theengine off. Check the lines for proper attach-ment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Automatic transaxle fluid level*: Checkthe level on the dipstick after putting theselector lever in the P (Park) position with theengine idling.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are noloose supports, cracks or holes. If the soundof the exhaust seems unusual or there is asmell of exhaust fumes, immediately locatethe trouble and correct it. (See ‘‘Precautionswhen starting and driving’’ in the ‘‘5. Startingand driving’’ section for exhaust gas (carbonmonoxide).)

Underbody: The underbody is frequentlyexposed to corrosive substances such asthose used on icy roads or to control dust. Itis very important to remove these substances,otherwise rust will form on the floor pan,frame, fuel lines and around the exhaustsystem. At the end of winter, the underbodyshould be thoroughly flushed with plain water,being careful to clean those areas where mudand dirt may accumulate. For additional infor-mation, see ‘‘Cleaning exterior’’ in the ‘‘7.Appearance and care’’ section.

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel,oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehiclehas been parked for a while. Water drippingfrom the air conditioner after use is normal. Ifyou should notice any leaks or if gasolinefumes are evident, check for the cause andhave it corrected immediately.

MAINTENANCE

9-5

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 223: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

PERIODIC MAINTENANCESCHEDULESTo ensure smooth, trouble-free, safe andeconomical driving, INFINITI provides twodifferent maintenance schedules that may beused, depending upon the conditions in whichyou usually drive. These schedules containboth distance and time intervals, up to 60,000miles (96,000 km)/48 months. For mostpeople, the odometer reading will indicatewhen service is needed. However, if you drivevery little, your vehicle should be serviced atthe regular time intervals shown in the sched-ule. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or48 months, continue the periodic main-tenance at the same mileage/time in-tervals.

SCHEDULE 1Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 ifyour driving habits frequently include one ormore of the following driving conditions:

O repeated short trips of less than 5miles (8 km).

O repeated short trips of less than 10miles (16 km) with outside tempera-tures remaining below freezing.

O operating in hot weather in stop-and-go rush hour traffic.

O extensive idling and/or low speeddriving for long distances, such aspolice, taxi or door-to-door deliveryuse.

O driving in dusty conditions.

O driving on rough, muddy, or saltspread roads.

O towing a trailer, using a camper or acar-top carrier.

SCHEDULE 2Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 ifnone of the driving conditions shown in

Schedule 1 apply to your driving habits.

MAINTENANCE

9-6

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 224: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Schedule 1Abbreviations: R = Replace I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. [ ]: At the mileage intervals only

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

Perform at number of miles,kilometers or months, which-ever comes first.

Miles x 1,000 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 60(km x 1,000) (6) (12) (18) (24) (30) (36) (42) (48) (54) (60) (66) (72) (78) (84) (90) (96)Months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48

Emission control system maintenanceDrive belts See NOTE (1) I*Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) [R] [R]EVAP vapor lines I* I*Fuel lines I* I*Fuel filter See NOTE (3)*Engine coolant See NOTE (4) R*Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R REngine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-31U00 or equivalent) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R RSpark plugs (Use PLATINUM-TIPPED type) [R]Intake & exhaust valve clearance See NOTE (5)

NOTE: (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months.(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.(3) If vehicle is operated under extremely adverse weather conditions or in areas where ambient temperatures are either

extremely low or extremely high, the filters might become clogged. In such an event, replace them immediately.(4) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.(5) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance.(6) Maintenance items and intervals with ‘‘*’’ are recommended by INFINITI for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not

perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenanceitems and intervals are required.

MAINTENANCE

9-7

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 225: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Schedule 1Abbreviations: I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

Perform at number of miles, kilome-ters or months, whichever comesfirst.

Miles x 1,000 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 60

(km x 1,000) (6) (12) (18) (24) (30) (36) (42) (48) (54) (60) (66) (72) (78) (84) (90) (96)

Months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48

Chassis and body maintenanceBrake lines & cables I I I I

Brake pads & discs I I I I I I I I

Manual transaxle oil & automatic tran-saxle fluid See NOTE (1) I I I I

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts I I I I I I I I

Exhaust system I I I I I I I I

Front drive shaft boots I I I I I I I I

Supplemental air bag system See NOTE (2)

NOTE: (1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect)oil at every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.

(2) Inspect the supplemental air bag system 10 years after the date of manufacture noted on the F.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

MAINTENANCE

9-8

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 226: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Schedule 2Abbreviations: R = Replace I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. [ ]: At the mileage intervals only

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

Perform at number of miles, kilome-ters or months, whichever comes first.

Miles x 1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60

(km x 1,000) (12) (24) (36) (48) (60) (72) (84) (96)

Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48

Emission control system maintenanceDrive belts See NOTE (1) I*

Air cleaner filter [R] [R]

EVAP vapor lines I* I*

Fuel lines I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (2)*

Engine coolant See NOTE (3) R*

Engine oil R R R R R R R R

Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-31U00 or equivalent) R R R R R R R R

Spark plugs (Use PLATINUM-TIPPED type) [R]

Intake & exhaust valve clearance See NOTE (4)

NOTE: (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months.(2) If vehicle is operated under extremely adverse weather conditions or in areas where ambient temperatures are either

extremely low or extremely high, the filters might become clogged. In such an event, replace them immediately.(3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.(4) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance.(5) Maintenance items and intervals with ‘‘*’’ are recommended by INFINITI for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not

perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenanceitems and intervals are required.

MAINTENANCE

9-9

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 227: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Schedule 2Abbreviations: I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

Perform at number of miles, kilometers ormonths, whichever comes first.

Miles x 1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60

(km x 1,000) (12) (24) (36) (48) (60) (72) (84) (96)

Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48

Chassis and body maintenance

Brake lines & cables I I I I

Brake pads & discs I I I I

Manual transaxle oil & automatic transaxle fluid I I I I

Steering gear linkage, axle & suspension parts I I

Exhaust system I I

Front drive shaft boots I I I I

Supplemental air bag system See NOTE (1)

NOTE: (1) Inspect the supplemental air bag system 10 years after the date of manufacture noted on the F.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

MAINTENANCE

9-10

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 228: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

EXPLANATION OF MAINTE-NANCE ITEMSAdditional information on the followingitems with ‘‘*’’ is found in the ‘‘8.Do-it-yourself’’ section.

Emission control system mainte-nanceDrive belts*: Check drive belts for wear,fraying or cracking and also for proper ten-sion. Replace the drive belts if found dam-aged.

Air cleaner filter: Under normal drivingconditions, the air cleaner filter should bereplaced in accordance with the maintenanceschedule. However, driving the vehicle industy areas may cause more rapid clogging ofthe element. Consequently, the element mayhave to be replaced more frequently.

Vapor lines: Check vapor lines and connec-tions for failure or looseness. If leaks arefound, replace them.

Fuel lines: Check the fuel hoses, piping andconnections for leaks, looseness or deteriora-tion. Replace any parts if they are damaged.

Fuel filter: If the vehicle is operated underextremely adverse weather conditions or inareas where ambient temperatures are eitherextremely low or extremely high, the filtermight become clogged. In such an event,replace the filter immediately.

Engine coolant*: Drain and flush the cool-ing system.

Engine oil & oil filter*: Under normaldriving conditions, the engine oil and oil filtershould be replaced in accordance with themaintenance schedule. However, under severedriving conditions, they may have to bereplaced more frequently.

Spark plugs*: Replace with new plugshaving the correct heat range.

Intake & exhaust valve clearance: checkand adjust the valve clearance.

Chassis and body maintenanceBrake lines & cables: Check the brakelines and hoses (including brake boostervacuum hoses, connections & check valve)and parking brake cables for proper attach-ment, leaks, cracks, chafing, abrasion, dete-rioration, etc.

Brake pads & discs: Check these and theother neighboring brake components for wear,deterioration and leaks. Under severe drivingconditions, they may have to be inspectedmore frequently.

Manual transaxle oil & automatic tran-saxle fluid*: Check the oil level and visuallyinspect for signs of leakage.

Under severe driving conditions, the oilshould be replaced at the specified interval.

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspen-sion parts, and drive shaft boots: Checkfor damage, looseness and leakage of oil orgrease. Under severe driving conditions, more

MAINTENANCE

9-11

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 229: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

frequent inspection should be performed.

Exhaust system: Visually check the exhaustpipes, muffler, and hangers for proper attach-ment, leaks, cracks, chafing, abrasion, dete-rioration, etc. Under severe driving conditions,inspection should be performed more fre-quently.

Supplemental air bag, and supplemen-tal side air bag systems: Maintenance forthe supplemental air bag or supplemental sideair bag system should be done by an autho-rized INFINITI dealer.

MAINTENANCE

9-12

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 230: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual
Page 231: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

10 TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

Major systems and how they work........... 10-2Infiniti VQ30DE engine with electronicconcentrated engine control system ......... 10-2On board diagnostic system ..................... 10-6Electronically controlled 4-speed automatictransmission .............................................. 10-7Anti-lock braking ....................................... 10-9Anti-lock brake/traction control system(if so equipped)....................................... 10-11Automatic air conditioner ........................ 10-14Supplemental restraint system................ 10-15Paint ........................................................ 10-18Hard clear coat (New cross linking clearcoat) ........................................................ 10-18Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants .......................................... 10-19Fuel recommendation .............................. 10-20Engine oil and oil filterrecommendation...................................... 10-22

Recommended SAE viscosity number .... 10-24Air conditioning system refrigerant andlubricant recommendations..................... 10-24Specifications .......................................... 10-25Engine...................................................... 10-25Tires and wheels ..................................... 10-26Dimensions and weights ......................... 10-26When traveling or registering yourvehicle in another country....................... 10-27Vehicle identification................................ 10-27Vehicle identification number (VIN)plate......................................................... 10-27Vehicle identification number (Chassisnumber)................................................... 10-28Engine serial number .............................. 10-28F.M.V.S.S. certification label ................... 10-28Emission control information label ......... 10-29Tire placard.............................................. 10-29Air conditioner specification label ........... 10-29

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 232: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Installing front license plate .................... 10-30Vehicle loading information..................... 10-30Terms ...................................................... 10-30Determining vehicle load capacity........... 10-31Loading tips............................................. 10-31Towing a trailer ....................................... 10-32Maximum load limits............................... 10-32

Towing safety .......................................... 10-33Uniform tire quality grading .................... 10-36Emission control system warranty.......... 10-37Reporting safety defects (US only) ......... 10-37Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)test (US only) .......................................... 10-38

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 233: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

MAJOR SYSTEMS AND HOWTHEY WORKThe common theme that applies to almost allof the automotive systems described in thissection is electronic controls. Because of theirspeed, precision and reliability, electroniccomponents are used wherever possible toincrease the efficiency and driveability of yourINFINITI.

The typical control system employs sensors,which collect information about operatingconditions and driver demand and send it,usually in the form of an electrical voltagesignal, to a control unit, which is a small,on-board computer. The control unit monitorsthe information provided by the sensors,calculates the optimum or best control, andmakes it happen through signals to electricalactuators in the engine or transmission orbrake system — wherever the control musttake place. The results can seem miraculous.

INFINITI VQ30DE ENGINEWITH ELECTRONIC CONCEN-TRATED ENGINE CONTROLSYSTEMSUMMARY

The magic of the system is that it coordinatesthe functions and control of air-fuel mixture,ignition timing, exhaust gas recirculation, andidle speed by the operation of a high-speedcomputer. The precisely coordinated controlof all of these functions allows the engine tooperate more efficiently and emission freethan would have been possible under earliertechnologies.

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-2

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 234: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

SIT0068

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-3

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 235: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

To get the most from an engine—in the wayof performance, smooth driveability, economyand control of harmful emissions—a numberof decisive factors must be controlled asprecisely as possible under all driving condi-tions. These factors include the following:

O the mixture of air and fuel that enters theengine cylinders during each intake strokeof the pistons.

O the timing of the spark that ignites thepressurized charge of air and fuel near theend of the compression stroke of thepistons.

O the temperature of the combustion thatoccurs in the cylinders, especially underload.

O engine idle speed under all conditions.

The engine in your INFINITI has degrees ofprecision in the automatic control of thesefactors that, only a few years ago, were notthought possible by any known technology.

Such a high performance engine must operatesmoothly and efficiently at all speed. And itmust do so with a minimum of fuel consump-tion and a minimum of emissions into theenvironment.

Mixture control

A gasoline engine requires a relatively richmixture of fuel to air during idle, a leanmixture for mid-range and cruise conditions,and a richer mixture for high load, high RPMoperation. The changes in amount of fueldelivered to the engine must occur smoothly,sometimes in response to sudden changes indemand from the driver. The INFINITI EngineControl System can give the engine preciselythe amount of fuel required for each condition,according to a precise measurement of theamount of air that is allowed into the engineeither through automatic devices provided foridle control or in response to your footpressure on the vehicle throttle.

All of the atmospheric air that is drawn intothe engine is measured by a mass air flowsensor.

This type of mass air flow sensor can respondvery quickly to changes in intake air quantityand density, which means as you step on thethrottle of your INFINITI to move into freewaytraffic, a voltage signal is sent to the ECM(Engine Control Module) instantly, and theECM responds just as quickly to provide morefuel by allowing the port fuel injectors to stayopen precise milliseconds longer. The resultis smooth acceleration, without stumble orhesitation.

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-4

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 236: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system

Your INFINITI engine uses a separate fuelinjector for each cylinder. These are placedinto the intake ports, so that they can sprayatomized fuel under pressure into the intakeair stream. These injectors are controlledsequentially, which means that they operate ineach cylinder according to the firing order.Each injector opens to spray its carefullymetered amount of fuel just before the intakevalve of the cylinder opens.

Constant pressure:

Fuel injector operation depends upon a supplyof fuel that is always maintained at a constantpressure in relation to the pressure in theengine intake manifold. Under pressure, thefuel travels through the line, through a largeand efficient fuel filter mounted under thehood, and into a fuel rail which feeds theinjectors. Fuel flows into the bases of the

injectors, where it is available to flow out ofthe injector nozzles and into the intake portswhen the injectors are opened electrically bysignals from the ECM.

By allowing more or less fuel to return to thetank, the fuel pressure regulator maintains thepressure at the injectors at 34 psi (2.4 kg/cm2,235 kPa).

That allows the ECM to adjust the flow of fuelinto the engine simply by controlling theamount of time the injectors stay open. Thelonger the injectors are held open, in milli-seconds, the more fuel flow.

Ignition timing controlFor best efficiency, ignition timing must bedynamic, that is it must change dependingupon the engine operating conditions. It mustrespond to engine load, RPM changes, enginetemperature changes, altitude, and so on. Forprecisely correct, automatic, adjustments inignition timing to take place, the ECM must

have sensors that tell about such conditions.The most important of these is the crank anglesensor. The camshaft position sensor tells theECM the engine speed and the positions ofthe pistons under all conditions.

Control of combustion tempera-tureOxides of nitrogen, in a number of chemicalvariations, are among the major componentsof photochemical air pollution. These nitrogenoxide compounds are formed in the enginewhen the combustion temperatures are higherthan about 2,000°F (1,093°C). One way todecrease nitrogen oxide formation in theengine, then, is to cool the temperature ofcombustion slightly. This is done by allowinga small amount of burned, and therefore inert,exhaust gases to recirculate back into theengine intake manifold where they can bedrawn into the cylinders.

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-5

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 237: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Idle air control system

The idle speed of an engine may be affectedby a number of conditions. For example, acold engine is inclined to run sluggishly atidle as well as under load. Such accessoriesas air conditioning and power steering mayload the engine during idle and bring the idlespeed down. Accessories that draw a largeamount of current from the alternator, such asheadlamps, window defoggers, radiator fans,etc., increase the load on the engine. So, toprovide smooth idle under all conditions, andto provide the best overall fuel economy, theEngine Control System gives computer con-trolled, automatic idle speed control. Usingthe information provided by the sensors, theECM calculates the best idle speed and bringsit about through the IACV-AAC valve, whichallows more, or less, air into the intakemanifold. Because the air is measured by themass air flow sensor, the injectors alwaysfollow along with the correct pulse duration,

so the mixture is always correct.

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYS-TEMThe ECM has an on board diagnostic systemfunction, which monitors all of the EngineControl System circuits and components forproblems. If the control unit detects a prob-lem, it stores the information for retrieval byan experienced INFINITI technician at yourdealership. So diagnosis and repair, even ofthis sophisticated system, may be made easierand more accurate.

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-6

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 238: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED 4-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

SIT0067

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-7

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 239: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

The function of an automotive transmission, isto provide a means of matching engine speedand vehicle speed in such a way that theengine is kept in the most efficient RPM rangeat all times.

Hydraulic controlIn your INFINITI transmission, hydraulic flowand pressure are under the control of Trans-mission Control Module (TCM) which usesinformation from a number of sensors tocalculate the most efficient gear ratio. TheTransmission Control Module (TCM) selectsthe proper gear, it directs fluid to actuate theappropriate clutches, it controls fluid pressureprecisely to allow smooth, shock-free shifts,and it controls the timing of torque converterlock-up.

Automatic Transmission ControlFunctions:

Using the information provided by the sen-sors, the TCM calculates the best possible

operation of the transmission for any condi-tion by controlling the following functions:

O shift timing.

O lock-up timing.

O engine brake operation timing.

Self Diagnosis:

Any electrical malfunction in the system willbe sensed by the Transmission Control Mod-ule (TCM), which stores the information inmemory.

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-8

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 240: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING

SIT0017

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-9

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 241: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

In sudden braking and on wet surfaces, thewheels are more easily locked. If the frontwheels lock, steering control may be difficult.

If the rear wheels lock, swerving or spinningof the vehicle may result. To reduce thispossibility, short and quick pumping of thebrakes is needed, but this technique can bedifficult for some drivers, especially in anemergency. The Anti-lock Braking System(ABS) can perform this pumping actionquickly and is automatic when the driverdepresses the brake pedal firmly. Since thebraking force is controlled delicately by elec-tronic control, wheel lock-up is minimized,and steering operation remains normal.

Brake pedal kickback remains minimal, andsmooth pedal feel is ensured even when theABS is operating.

Fail-safeIf the ABS control unit detects a malfunction inany of the system electrical circuits, it will

de-activate the anti-lock function by cuttingelectrical power to the ABS actuator. Thebraking system will then work as usual,without the anti-lock function.

If the control unit stops the ABS systemoperation, the ABS warning lamp will glow.This will aid your INFINITI dealership techni-cian in diagnosis of the problem.

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-10

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 242: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE/TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (if so equipped)

SIT0066

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-11

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 243: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Anti-lock brake:

In sudden braking and on wet surfaces, thewheels are more easily locked. If the frontwheels lock, steering control may be difficult.

If the rear wheels lock, swerving or spinningof the vehicle may result. To reduce thispossibility, short and quick pumping of thebrakes is needed, but this technique can bedifficult for some drivers, especially in anemergency. The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)can perform this pumping action quickly andis automatic when the driver depresses thebrake pedal firmly. Since the braking force iscontrolled delicately by electronic control,wheel lock-up is minimized, and steeringoperation remains normal.

Brake pedal kickback remains minimal, andsmooth pedal feel is ensured even when theABS is operating.

Traction control system:

The traction control system (TCS) is designedto limit wheel slip during acceleration bycutting fuel to selected cylinders and changingtransmission shift timing.

The ABS/TCS computer monitors wheel speedslip through the ABS wheel speed sensors anddetermines the desired torque reductionneeded to minimize wheel spin.

The torque reduction by ABS/TCS computermay result in a combination of fuel cutoff andchanging shift timing of the transmission.

The torque reduction is sent from theABS/TCS computer through the data link tothe Engine Control Module (ECM) and Trans-mission Control Module (TCM).

The ECM will cut off fuel and/or TCM changeshift timing to achieve the torque reduction.

This system helps to make the vehicle easierto drive by reducing wheel spin when starting

or accelerating in slippery conditions (forexample, on wet or snow-covered surfaces).

System malfunctionAnti-lock brake:

If the ABS/TCS control unit detects a malfunc-tion in any of the ABS system electricalcircuits, it will de-activate the anti-lock func-tion by cutting electrical power to the ABSactuator. The braking system will then work asusual, without the anti-lock function.

If the control unit stops the ABS systemoperation, the ABS warning lamp will glow.This will aid your INFINITI dealership techni-cian in diagnosis of the problem.

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-12

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 244: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Traction control system:

If the ABS/TCS control unit detects a malfunc-tion in any of the TCS system electricalcircuits, the ABS/TCS control unit sends asignal to the Engine Control Module (ECM).The system will then work as usual, withoutthe TCS function.

If the control unit stops the TCS systemoperation, the indicator and

indicator will glow. This will aid yourINFINITI dealership technician in diagnosis ofthe problem.

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-13

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 245: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

AUTOMATIC AIR CONDI-TIONERFor precision control over the interior climateof your INFINITI, there is a control unit or autoamplifier, and actuators to provide the mostcomfortable temperature, humidity and airflow inside the vehicle. For quieter, smootherand more economical operation, the systemuses a variable displacement compressor,which eliminates the need for compressoron-off cycling.

ITI040M

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-14

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 246: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

The auto amplifier also has a self diagnosisfeature to recognize any system circuit mal-function and aid your INFINITI dealershiptechnician in a quick, accurate repair if itbecomes necessary.

The auto amplifier receives information fromthe control panel, by which you may requestthe interior weather you wish, and fromsensors placed in strategic locations in thevehicle. Once you have signaled a targettemperature at the control panel, the autoamplifier uses information from the sensors tocalculate what must be done.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM

Supplemental air bag andsupplemental side air bag sys-temsSupplemental air bags are designed to inflatein certain types of frontal collisions, andsupplemental side air bags are designed toinflate in certain types of side collisions.

Supplemental air bags help cushion the im-pact force to the front occupants’ face andchest in certain types of frontal collisions inconjunction with the seat belts.

Supplemental side air bags help cushion theimpact force to the front occupants’ chest incertain types of side collisions.

When supplemental air bags receive a signalfrom the diagnosis sensor unit for certaintypes of frontal collisions, the supplementalair bags inside the supplemental air bagmodules fill with gas, inflating instantly.

When supplemental side air bags receivesignals from the satellite sensor in the lowercenter pillar and the diagnosis sensor unit forcertain types of side collisions, the supple-mental side air bag inside the supplementalside air bag module fills with gas, inflatinginstantly.

The collision mode under which inflationoccurs is different for the supplemental air bagand the supplemental side air bag. For ex-ample, even if the supplemental air bagactivates, the supplemental side air bag mightnot activate.

In addition, in left side collisions, only the leftsupplemental side air bag is designed toinflate and in right side collisions, only theright supplemental side air bag is designed toinflate.

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-15

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 247: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

SIT0053A

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-16

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 248: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Pre-tensioner seat belt systemThe front seat belt pre-tensioner, working withthe retractor, helps tighten the seat belt whenthe vehicle is involved in certain types ofcollisions, thus helping to restrain the occu-pants on the front seats. This, in conjunctionwith the supplemental air bag systems, re-duces impact forces to the occupants in acollision.When the pre-tensioner receives a signal atthe time of a collision, gas inside the pre-tensioner expands, thereby rotating the rotatorto operate the retractor. The pre-tensionerswill not usually operate when the vehicle isinvolved in side or rear-end collisions.

SIT0056

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-17

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 249: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

PAINTHARD CLEAR COAT (New crosslinking clear coat)

Your INFINITI paint coating has been appliedwith the finest appearance and best durabilityin mind:O To ensure enhanced appearance, (i.e.,

solid, pearl and metallic paint clearness),the hard clear coat (2-coat/1-bake, or3-coat/2-bake type) is used instead of theconventional clear coat (acrylic resin).

O Improved scratch resistance—The hard clear coat has higher resistanceagainst scratches which may be caused bycar wash equipment than the conventionalcoats.

O Refinishing the clear coat should only bedone using hard clear type materials, toensure compatibility in the rate of refinishgloss retention.

ITI047-A

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-18

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 250: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTSThe following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedureinstructed in the ‘‘8. Do-it-yourself’’ section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate)RecommendedspecificationsUS

measureImp

measure Liter

Fuel 18-1/2 gal 15-3/8 gal 70 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)*1

Engine oil*6Drain and refill

With oil filter change 4-1/4 qt 3-1/2 qt 4.0 O API Certification Mark *2, *3O API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving II or API grade SJ, Energy Conserving *2, *3O ILSAC grade GF-II *2, *3Without oil filter change 3-7/8 qt 3-1/4 qt 3.7

Cooling systemWith reservoir 9 qt 7-1/2 qt 8.5

Genuine NISSAN anti-freeze coolant or equivalentReservoir 7/8 qt 3/4 qt 0.8

Manual transmission gear oil — — — API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 80W-90 only

Automatic transmission fluid

Refill to the proper oil level according to the instruc-tions in the ‘‘8. Do-it-yourself’’ section.

Nissan Matic ‘‘D’’ (Continental US and Alaska) or Genuine Nissan Automatic TransmissionFluid (Canada).*4

Power steering fluid Type DEXRONTM III or equivalent

Brake and clutch fluid Genuine Nissan Brake Fluid*5 or equivalentDOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116)

Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*7

Air conditioning system lubricants — — — INFINITI A/C System OilType S or exact equivalent

*1: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for fuel recommendation.*2: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.*3: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for recommended SAE viscosity number.*4: DexronTM III/MerconTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact an INFINITI dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recom-

mended brand(s) of DexronTM III/MerconTM automatic transmission fluid.*5: Available in mainland US through your INFINITI dealer.*6: For additional information, see ‘‘Engine oil’’ in the ‘‘8. Do-it-yourself’’ section for changing engine oil.*7: For additional information, see ‘‘Vehicle identification’’ in the ‘‘10. Technical and consumer information’’ for air conditioner specification label.

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-19

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 251: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Unleaded premium gasoline with anoctane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octanenumber 96)

If unleaded premium gasoline is notavailable, unleaded regular gasolinewith an octane rating of at least 87 AKI(Research octane number 91) can beused.

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-mance, the use of unleaded premiumgasoline is recommended.

CAUTION

Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol devices and systems, andcould also affect the warranty

coverage.

Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, since thiswill damage the three way catalyst.

Reformulated gasolineSome fuel suppliers are now producing refor-mulated gasolines. These gasolines are spe-cially designed to reduce vehicle emissions.INFINITI supports efforts towards cleaner airand suggests that you use reformulated gaso-line when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenatesSome fuel suppliers sell gasoline containingoxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE andmethanol with or without advertising theirpresence. INFINITI does not recommend theuse of fuels of which oxygenate content andthe fuel compatibility for your INFINITI cannotbe readily determined. If in doubt, ask your

service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, pleasetake the following precautions as the usage ofsuch fuels may cause vehicle performanceproblems and/or fuel system damage.

O The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

O If an oxygenate-blend, excepting amethanol blend, is used, it shouldcontain no more than 10% oxygen-ate. (MTBE may, however, be addedup to 15%.)

O If a methanol blend is used, itshould contain no more than 5%methanol (methyl alcohol, wood al-cohol). It should also contain a suit-able amount of appropriate cosol-vents and corrosion inhibitors. If notproperly formulated with appropriatecosolvents and corrosion inhibitors,

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-20

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 252: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

such methanol blends may causefuel system damage and/or vehicleperformance problems. At this time,sufficient data is not available toensure that all methanol blends aresuitable for use in INFINITI vehicles.

If any undesirable driveability problems suchas engine stalling and hard hot starting areexperienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuelor a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline duringrefueling. Gasoline containing oxygen-ates can cause paint damage.

Aftermarket fuel additivesINFINITI does not recommend the use of anyfuel additives (i.e. fuel injector cleaner, octanebooster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.)which are sold commercially. Many of theseadditives intended for gum, varnish or depositremoval may contain active solvent or similar

ingredients that can be harmful to the fuelsystem and engine.

Octane rating tips

In most parts of North America, you shoulduse unleaded gasoline with an octane rating ofat least 87 or 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)number. However, you may use unleadedgasoline with an octane rating as low as 85AKI number in these high altitude areas [over4,000 ft (1,219 m)] such as: Colorado, Mon-tana, New Mexico, Utah, Wyoming, northeast-ern Nevada, southern Idaho, western SouthDakota, western Nebraska, and that part ofTexas which is directly south of New Mexico.

Using unleaded gasoline with an oc-tane rating lower than stated above cancause persistent, heavy spark knock.(Spark knock is a metallic rappingnoise.) If severe, this can lead to en-gine damage. If you detect a persistentheavy spark knock even when using

gasoline of the stated octane rating, orif you hear steady spark knock whileholding a steady speed on level roads,have your dealer correct the condition.Failure to correct the condition is mis-use of the vehicle, for which INFINITI isnot responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing will result in knock-ing, after-run or overheating. This in turn maycause excessive fuel consumption or damageto the engine. If any of the above symptomsare encountered, have your vehicle checked atan INFINITI dealer or other competent servicefacility.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This isno cause for concern, because you getthe greatest fuel benefit when there islight spark knock for a short time underheavy engine load.

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-21

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 253: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct quality,and viscosity oil to ensure satisfactory enginelife and performance. INFINITI recommendsthe use of a low friction oil (energy conserving

oil) in order to improve fuel economy andconserve energy. Oils which do not have thespecified quality label should not be used asthey could cause engine damage.

Only those engine oils with the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) certification mark onthe front of the container should be used. This

type of oil supersedes the existing API SG orSH and Energy Conserving II categories.

If you cannot find engine oil with the APIcertification mark, use an API grade SG/SH,Energy Conserving II or API grade SJ, EnergyConserving oil. An oil with a single designa-tion SG or SH, or in combination with othercategories (For example, SG/CC or SG/CD)may also be used if one with the APIcertification mark cannot be found. An ILSACgrade GF-II oil can also be used.

Mineral based or synthetic type oils may beused in your INFINITI vehicle. These oils musthowever, meet the API quality and SAE vis-cosity ratings specified for your vehicle. Donot mix mineral based and synthetic type oilsin the engine at the same time.

Oil additivesINFINITI does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is notnecessary when the proper oil type is used

SIT0025

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-22

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 254: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

and maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or hasbeen previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosityThe engine oil viscosity or thickness changeswith temperature. Because of this, it is impor-tant that the engine oil viscosity be selectedbased on the temperatures at which thevehicle will be operated before the next oilchange. The recommended SAE viscositynumber chart shows the recommended oilviscosities for the expected ambient tempera-tures. Choosing an oil viscosity other thanthat recommended could cause serious enginedamage.

Selecting the correct oil filterYour new vehicle is equipped with a high-quality genuine INFINITI oil filter. When re-placing, use the genuine oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described in changeintervals.

Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Oil and filter other thanthe specified quality, or oil and filter changeintervals longer than recommended couldreduce engine life. Damage to engines causedby improper maintenance or use of incorrectoil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the new INFINITI vehicle warran-ties.

Your engine was filled with a high qualityengine oil when it was built. You do not haveto change the oil before the first recommendedchange interval. Oil and filter change intervalsdepend upon how you use your vehicle.Operation under the following conditions mayrequire more frequent oil and filter changes.

O repeated short distance driving at coldoutside temperatures,

O driving in dusty conditions,

O extensive idling,

O towing a trailer.

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-23

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 255: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOS-ITY NUMBER

SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred forall ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30viscosity oil may be used if the ambienttemperature is above 0°F (−18°C).

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND LUBRI-CANT RECOMMENDATIONSThe air conditioning system in thisINFINITI vehicle must be charged withthe refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) andthe lubricant, INFINITI A/C System OilType S or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

Use of any other refrigerant or lubri-cant will cause severe damage andyou will need to replace your vehi-cle’s entire air conditioning system.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourINFINITI vehicle will not harm the earth’sozone layer. Although this refrigerant does notaffect the earth’s atmosphere, certain govern-mental regulations require the recovery andrecycling of any refrigerant during automotiveair conditioning system service. Your INFINITIdealer has the trained technicians and equip-ment needed to recover and recycle your airconditioning system refrigerant.

Contact your INFINITI dealer whenever servic-ing your air conditioning system.

SIT0002A

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-24

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 256: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

SPECIFICATIONSENGINE

Model VQ30DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.661 x 2.885 (93.0 x 73.3)

Displacement cu in (cm3) 182.34 (2,988)

Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6*

Idle speed rpmSee the emission control label onthe underside of the hood.

Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm

CO percentage at idle speed [No air] %

Spark plugStandard PFR5G-11

Service option PFR4G-11, PFR6G-11

Spark plug gap in (mm) —

Camshaft operation Timing chain

Alternator belt size

Width x Length in (mm) 0.8409 x 43.11 (21.36 x 1,095)

The spark ignition system of this ve-hicle meets all requirements of theCanadian Interference-Causing Equip-ment Regulations.

SIT0005

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-25

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 257: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

TIRES AND WHEELS

Road wheelAluminum

15 x 6.5JJ16 x 6.5JJ*1

Offset in (mm) 1.77 (45)

Tire size

ConventionalP205/65R15 92HP215/55R16 91H*1

SpareConventional*2T125/70D16*3T125/90D16*4

*1: t-pack*2: Factory option*3: Except t-pack A/T*4: t-pack AT, option for t-pack M/T and models with viscous LSD

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Sedan

Overall length in (mm) 189.6 (4,815)

Overall width in (mm) 69.7 (1,770)

Overall height in (mm) 55.7 (1,415)

Front tread in (mm) 59.8 (1,520)

Rear tread in (mm) 59.1 (1,500)

Wheelbase in (mm) 106.3 (2,700)

Gross vehicle weight rating lb (kg)

See the F.M.V.S.S. certi-fication label on the driv-er’s side lock pillar.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-26

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 258: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

WHEN TRAVELING OR REG-ISTERING YOUR VEHICLE INANOTHER COUNTRYWhen planning to travel in anothercountry, you should first find out if the fuelavailable is suitable for your vehicle’s engine.

Using fuel with too low an octane/cetanerating may cause engine damage. All gasolinevehicles must be operated with unleadedengine gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking yourvehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is notavailable.

When transferring the registration ofyour vehicle to another country, state,province or district, it may be necessary tomodify the vehicle to meet local laws andregulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicleemission control and safety standards varyaccording to the country, state, province or

district; therefore, vehicle specifications maydiffer.

When any vehicle is to be taken intoanother country, state, province or dis-trict and registered, its modifications,transportation, and registration are theresponsibility of the user. INFINITI isnot responsible for any inconveniencethat may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONVEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate isattached as shown. This number is the iden-tification for your vehicle and is used in thevehicle registration.

SIT0006

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-27

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 259: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (Chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown.

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine asshown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LA-BEL

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards(F.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed asshown. This label contains valuable vehicleinformation, such as: Gross Vehicle WeightRatings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR), month and year of manufacture,Vehicle Identification Number, (VIN), etc. Re-view it carefully.

SIT0007

SIT0008

SIT0009

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-28

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 260: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

EMISSION CONTROL INFOR-MATION LABEL

The emission control information label isattached as shown.

TIRE PLACARD

The cold tire pressure is shown on the tireplacard affixed to the center console lid.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICA-TION LABEL

The label is affixed inside of the hood asshown.

SIT0010

SIT0011

SIT0012

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-29

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 261: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

INSTALLING FRONTLICENSE PLATE

Use the following steps to mount the licenseplate:

1. Mount the license plate bracket with 0.24in (6 mm) diameter by 0.63 in (16 mm)long tapping screws.

2. Mount the license plate with the 0.24 in (6mm) bolts. The bolts used to fasten thelicense plate to the bracket are not in-cluded in the bracket assembly.

VEHICLE LOADING INFOR-MATION

WARNING

O It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area inside of a ve-hicle. In a collision, people ridingin these areas are more likely tobe seriously injured or killed.

O Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts.

O Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with thefollowing terms before loading your vehicle:

O Curb Weight (actual weight of your ve-hicle) - vehicle weight including: standardand optional equipment, fluids, emergencytools, and spare tire assembly. This weightdoes not include passengers and cargo.

O GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weightplus the combined weight of passengersand cargo.

SIT0013

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-30

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 262: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

O GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) -maximum total weight (load) limit speci-fied for the vehicle.

O GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maxi-mum weight (load) limit specified for thefront or rear axle.

DETERMINING VEHICLE LOADCAPACITYThe load capacity of this vehicle is determinedby weight, not by available cargo space. Forexample, a luggage rack, bike carrier, cartopcarrier or similar equipment does not increaseload carrying capacity of your vehicle.

To determine vehicle load capacity:

Vehicle weight can be determined by using acommercial-grade scale, found at places suchas a truck stop, gravel quarry, grain elevator,or a scrap metal recycling facility.

1. Determine the curb weight of your vehicle.

2. Compare the curb weight amount to the

GVWR specified for your vehicle to deter-mine how much more weight your vehiclecan carry.

3. After loading (cargo and passengers), re-weigh your vehicle to determine if eitherGVWR or GAWR for your vehicle is ex-ceeded. If GVWR is exceeded, removecargo as necessary. If either the front orrear GAWR is exceeded, shift the load orremove cargo as necessary.

LOADING TIPSO The GVW must not exceed GVWR or

GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S.certification label.

O Do not load the front and rear axle to theGAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

WARNING

O Properly secure all cargo to helpprevent it from sliding or shifting.Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop orcollision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

O Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rear GAWRs.If you do, parts on your vehiclecan break, or it can change theway your vehicle handles. Thiscould result in loss of control andcause personal injury.

O Overloading can shorten the lifeof your vehicle. Failures causedby overloading are not covered byyour warranty.

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-31

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 263: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

TOWING A TRAILER

Your new vehicle was designed to be usedprimarily to carry passengers and cargo. Re-member that towing a trailer will place addi-tional loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain, steering, braking and other systems.

Information on trailer towing ability and thespecial equipment required should be ob-tained from your INFINITI dealer. He canobtain an INFINITI Trailer Towing Guidefor you.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loadsNever allow the total trailer load to exceed 1,000lb (454 kg). The total trailer load equals trailerweight plus its cargo weight. Towing loadsgreater than 1,000 lb (454 kg) or using impropertowing equipment could adversely affect vehiclehandling, braking and performance.

WARNING

Vehicle damage and/or personal in-jury resulting from improper towingprocedures is not covered byINFINITI warranties. Information ontrailer towing and required towingequipment should be obtained fromdealers who specialize in providingtrailers or other towing equipment.

Tongue loadKeep the tongue load between 9 and 11% ofthe total trailer load. If the tongue loadbecomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allowfor proper tongue load.

ITI001

ITI002

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-32

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 264: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Maximum gross vehicleweight/maximum gross axleweightThe gross vehicle weight of the towing vehiclemust not exceed the GVWR shown on theF.M.V.S.S. certification label. The gross ve-hicle weight equals the combined weight ofthe unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,hitch, trailer tongue load and any other op-tional equipment. In addition, front or reargross axle weight must not exceed the GAWRshown on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHARTUNIT: lb (kg)

MAXIMUMTOWING LOAD

1,000 (454)

MAXIMUMTONGUE LOAD

110 (49)

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitchChoose a proper hitch for your vehicle andtrailer. A genuine INFINITI trailer hitch isavailable from your INFINITI dealer (Canadaonly). Make sure the trailer hitch is securelyattached to the vehicle, to help avoid personalinjury or property damage due to sway causedby crosswinds, rough road surfaces or pass-ing trucks.

CAUTION

O Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

O The hitch should not be attachedto or affect the operation of theimpact-absorbing bumper

O Do not modify the vehicle exhaustsystem, brake system, etc. whenthe hitch is installed.

O To reduce the possibility of addi-tional damage if your vehicle isstruck from the rear, where prac-tical, remove the hitch when notin use. Remove the receiver whennot in use. After the hitch is re-moved, seal the bolt holes toprevent exhaust fumes, water ordust from entering the passengercompartment.

O Regularly check that all hitchmounting bolts are securelymounted.

Tire pressures

O When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicletires to the recommended cold tire pres-sure indicated on the tire placard (locatedon the inside of the center console lid.)

O Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-33

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 265: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

proper inflation pressure should be inaccordance with the trailer and tire manu-facturers’ specifications.

Safety chains

Always use a suitable chain between yourvehicle and the trailer. The chain should becrossed and should be attached to the hitch,not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure toleave enough slack in the chain to permitturning corners.

Trailer lights

Trailer lights should comply with federaland/or local regulations. When wiring thevehicle for towing, connect the stop and taillight pickup into the vehicle electrical circuit ata point between the sensor and stop light orlight switch.

Trailer brakesIf your trailer is equipped with a brakingsystem, make sure it conforms to federal

and/or local regulations and that it is properlyinstalled.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake systemdirectly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

O Be certain your vehicle maintains a levelposition when a loaded and/or unloadedtrailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicleif it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for impropertongue load, overload, worn suspension orother possible causes of either condition.

O Always secure items in the trailer toprevent load shifts while driving.

O Be certain your rear view mirrors conformto all federal, state or local regulations. Ifnot, install any mirrors required for towing

before driving the vehicle.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of thevehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,stopping and backing up in an area which is freefrom traffic. Steering stability, and braking per-formance will be somewhat different than undernormal driving conditions.

O Always secure items in the trailer toprevent load shift while driving.

O Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

O Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

O Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

O Always block the wheels on both vehicleand trailer when parking. Parking on aslope is not recommended; however, if youmust do so, and if your vehicle isequipped with automatic transmission,first block the wheels and apply the park-

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-34

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 266: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

ing brake, and then move the transmissionselector lever into the P (Park) position. Ifyou move the selector lever to the P (Park)position before blocking the wheels andapplying the parking brake, transmissiondamage could occur.

O When going down a hill, shift into a lowergear and use the engine braking effect.When ascending a long grade, downshiftthe transmission to a lower gear andreduce speed to reduce chances of engineoverloading and/or overheating.

O If the engine coolant rises to an extremelyhigh temperature when the air conditioningsystem is on, turn off the air conditioner.Coolant heat can be additionally vented byopening the windows, switching the fancontrol to high and setting the temperaturecontrol to the HOT position.

O Trailer towing requires more fuel thannormal circumstances.

O Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500miles (800 km).

O Have your vehicle serviced more often thanat intervals specified in the recommendedmaintenance schedule.

O When making a turn, your trailer wheelswill be closer to the inside of the turn thanyour vehicle wheels. To compensate forthis, make a larger than normal turningradius during the turn.

O Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect vehicle/trailer handling, pos-sibly causing vehicle sway. When beingpassed by larger vehicles, be prepared forpossible changes in crosswinds that couldaffect vehicle handling. If swaying doesoccur, firmly grip the steering wheel, steerstraight ahead, and immediately (butgradually) reduce vehicle speed. Thiscombination will help stabilize the vehicle.Never increase speed.

O Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requiresconsiderably more distance than normalpassing. Remember the length of the trailermust also pass the other vehicle beforeyou can safely change lanes.

O To maintain engine braking efficiency andelectrical charging performance, do notuse fifth gear (manual transmission) oroverdrive (automatic transmission).

O Avoid holding the brake pedal down toolong or too frequently. This could causethe brakes to overheat, resulting in re-duced braking efficiency.

When towing a trailer, change oil in thetransmission more frequently.

See ‘‘Periodic maintenance schedules’’in the ‘‘9. Maintenance’’ section.

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-35

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 267: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITYGRADINGDOT (Department Of Transportation) QualityGrades: All passenger car tires must conformto federal safety requirements in addition tothese grades.

TreadwearTreadwear grade is a comparative rating basedon tire wear rate when tested under controlledconditions on specified government testcourses. For example, a tire graded 150 wouldwear one and a half (1-1/2) times as well onthe government course as a tire graded 100.However, relative tire performance depends onactual driving conditions, and may vary sig-nificantly from the norm due to variations indriving habits, service practices and differ-ences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to yourvehicle tires is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, anddoes not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak trac-tion characteristics.

Temperature A, B and CTemperature grades are A (the highest), B, andC. They represent a tire’s resistance to heatbuild-up, and its ability to dissipate heat when

tested under controlled conditions on a speci-fied indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause tire material todegenerate, reducing tire life. Excessive tem-peratures can lead to sudden tire failure.Grade C corresponds to a performance levelwhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades A and B represent higher levels ofperformance on laboratory test wheels thanthe minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properlyinflated and not overloaded. Exces-sive speed, underinflation, or exces-sive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat buildupand possible tire failure.

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-36

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 268: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

EMISSION CONTROL SYS-TEM WARRANTYYour INFINITI is covered by the followingemission warranties.

For US:

O Emission Defects Warranty

O Emissions Performance Warranty(See Warranty Information Booklet for de-tails.)

For Canada:

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found withother vehicle warranties in your WarrantyInformation Booklet that comes with yourINFINITI. If you did not receive a WarrantyInformation Booklet, or it has become lost,you may obtain a replacement by writing to:

O INFINITI DivisionNissan Motor Corporation U.S.A.

Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 47038, Gardena, CA 90247-6838

O Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

O INFINITI DivisionNissan Motor Corporation in Hawaii, Ltd.Consumer Affairs Department2880 Kilihau StreetHonolulu, Hawaii 96819

REPORTING SAFETY DE-FECTS (US only)If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should imme-diately inform the National Highway Traf-fic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in ad-dition to notifying INFINITI.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or INFINITI.

To contact NHTSA, you may either callthe Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Washington,D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S.Department of Transportation, Washing-ton, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-37

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 269: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

other information about motor vehiclesafety from the Hotline.You may notify INFINITI by contacting ourConsumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at1-800-662-6200.In Hawaii call 808-836-0848.

READINESS FORINSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST(US only)Due to legal requirements in some states andCanadian Provinces, your vehicle may berequired to be in what is called the readycondition for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)test of the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the ready condition whenit is driven through certain driving patterns.Usually, the ready condition can be obtainedby ordinary usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired

or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle maybe reset to a not ready condition. Before takingthe I/M test, drive the vehicle through thefollowing pattern to set the vehicle to the readycondition. If you cannot or do not want toperform the driving pattern, an INFINITI dealercan conduct it for you.

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safemanner according to traffic condi-tions and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine when the engine coolanttemperature gauge needle points to C.Allow the engine to idle until the gaugeneedle points between the C and H (nor-mal operating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h), then quickly release the accelerator

pedal completely and maintain it releasedfor at least 6 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for amoment, then drive the vehicle at a speedof 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for atleast 5 minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55km/h) and maintain the speed for 20seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least three times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h) and maintain the speed for at least 3minutes.

8. Stop the vehicle and turn the engine off.

9. Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one moretime.

If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat thepreceding step. Any safe driving mode is

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-38

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 270: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

acceptable between steps. Do not stop theengine until step 7 is completed.

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-39

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 271: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual
Page 272: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

11 Index

A

ABS (Anti-lock brake system) .................................... 5-20Air bag

Warning labels ..................................................... 1-19Warning light ............................................... 1-19, 2-9

Air bag system(See supplemental restraint system).................... 1-13Side (See supplemental side air bag system)..... 1-15

Air cleaner housing filter ............................................ 8-17Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation ....................................... 4-3Air conditioner service................................... 4-3, 4-6Air conditioner specification label ............. 4-3, 10-29Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricationrecommendations ................................................... 4-3Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (if soequipped) ............................................................... 4-3

Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricantrecommendations ...................................................... 10-24Air flow charts .............................................................. 4-3AM-FM radio with cassette player ............................... 4-6AM-FM radio with cassette player and compact discplayer ............................................................................ 4-6AM-FM radio with compact disc player ...................... 4-6

Ambient temperature switch (AMB), Air conditioner ... 4-5Anchor point locations

Top tether strap.................................................... 1-40Antenna

Power ................................................................... 4-17Anti-lock Brake System (ABS).................................... 5-20Anti-lock brake warning light ..................................... 2-10Appearance care

Exterior appearance care........................................ 7-2Interior appearance care......................................... 7-4

Armrest.......................................................................... 1-5Ashtray (See cigarette lighter and ashtray) ................ 2-24Audio system ................................................................ 4-6Automatic

Anti-dazzling inside mirror .................................. 3-13Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)..................... 8-10Driving with automatic transmission ..................... 5-8Sunroof................................................................. 2-29

B

Battery ......................................................................... 8-13Battery replacement, (See multi-remote controlsystem).......................................................................... 3-8Belts (See drive belts) ................................................ 8-15

BrakeAnti-lock brake system (ABS).............................. 5-20Brake and clutch fluid.......................................... 8-12Brake booster ....................................................... 8-21Brake pedal .......................................................... 8-20Brake pedal check................................................ 8-20Parking brake check................................... 5-13, 8-20Parking brake operation....................................... 5-13System.................................................................. 5-20Warning light ......................................................... 2-9

Break-in schedule ....................................................... 5-17Bulb check/instrument panel ........................................ 2-7Bulb replacement ........................................................ 8-24

C

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants........... 10-19Car phone ................................................................... 4-17Cassette tape operation ................................................ 4-6CB radio or car phone ............................................... 4-17Cellular phone, Switch operation ............................... 2-48

Steering switch..................................................... 2-48Child restraints ........................................................... 1-31

Installation on front passenger seat .................... 1-41

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 273: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Installation on rear seat outboard or centerposition ................................................................ 1-33Precautions on child restraints............................ 1-31Top tether strap anchor point locations .............. 1-40With top tether strap............................................ 1-39

Child safety ................................................................. 1-25Child safety rear door lock........................................... 3-4Chimes ........................................................................ 2-14Cigarette lighter (accessory) and ashtray................... 2-24Circuit breaker, Fusible link ....................................... 8-22Cleaning exterior and interior....................................... 7-4Clock ........................................................................... 2-30Clutch

Clutch pedal ......................................................... 8-21Fluid ..................................................................... 8-12

Cold weather driving .................................................. 5-23Compact disc (CD) player operation............................ 4-6Compact spare tire ..................................................... 8-36Console box................................................................ 2-27Controls

Audio controls........................................................ 4-6Audio controls (rear).............................................. 4-6Audio controls (steering wheel)............................. 4-6Heater and air conditioner controls (automatic).... 4-3

CoolantCapacities and recommended fuel/lubricants............................................................ 10-19Changing engine coolant....................................... 8-6Checking engine coolant level............................... 8-5

Cornering light............................................................ 2-21Corrosion protection ..................................................... 7-5Cruise control ............................................................. 5-14Cup holder .................................................................. 2-26

D

Daytime running light system .................................... 2-20Defogger switch, Rear window and outside mirrordefogger switch........................................................... 2-18Dimensions and weights .......................................... 10-26Door ajar warning light ................................................ 2-8Drive belts................................................................... 8-15Driving

Cold weather driving............................................ 5-23Driving with automatic transmission ..................... 5-8Driving with manual transmission....................... 5-12

E

Economy, Fuel ............................................................ 5-17Emission control information label .......................... 10-29Emission control system warranty............................ 10-37Engine

Before starting the engine...................................... 5-7Block heater ......................................................... 5-25Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants.... 10-19Changing engine coolant....................................... 8-6Changing engine oil .............................................. 8-8Changing engine oil filter ...................................... 8-9Checking engine coolant ....................................... 8-5Checking engine oil level ...................................... 8-7Coolant temperature gauge.................................... 2-5Engine compartment check locations .................... 8-4Engine cooling system........................................... 8-5Engine oil ............................................................... 8-7Engine oil and oil filter recommendation.......... 10-22Engine oil viscosity............................................ 10-23Engine serial number......................................... 10-28Engine specifications ......................................... 10-25If your engine overheats ...................................... 6-10Starting the engine................................................. 5-7

INDEX

11-2

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 274: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

F

F.M.V.S.S. certification label .................................... 10-28Filter, Air cleaner housing filter ................................. 8-17Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch)............ 2-21Flat tire.......................................................................... 6-2Floor mat cleaning........................................................ 7-4Fluid

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)..................... 8-10Brake and clutch fluid.......................................... 8-12Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants.... 10-19Engine coolant ....................................................... 8-5Engine oil ............................................................... 8-7Power steering fluid............................................. 8-12Window washer fluid ........................................... 8-13

Fog light switch .......................................................... 2-21Front power seat adjustment ........................................ 1-3Fuel

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants.... 10-19Filler cap .............................................................. 3-11Filler lid................................................................ 3-11Filler lid and cap ................................................. 3-11Filler lid opener lever .......................................... 3-11Fuel economy....................................................... 5-17Fuel octane rating .............................................. 10-20

Fuel recommendation......................................... 10-20Gauge ..................................................................... 2-6

Fuses........................................................................... 8-21Fusible links ............................................................... 8-22

G

Garage door opener,Integrated HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver............. 2-31Gas cap ....................................................................... 3-11Gauge ............................................................................ 2-4

Engine coolant temperature gauge ........................ 2-5Fuel gauge ............................................................. 2-6Odometer ................................................................ 2-5Speedometer........................................................... 2-5Tachometer ............................................................. 2-5

General maintenance............................................. 9-2, 9-3Glove box.................................................................... 2-27Glove box lock............................................................ 2-27

H

Handset operation ....................................................... 2-45Hazard warning flasher switch.................................... 2-21Head restraints .............................................................. 1-4

Headlamps, (Bulb replacement).................................. 8-25Headlight switch ......................................................... 2-18Headlights, (Bulb replacement) .................................. 8-25Heated seats................................................................ 2-22Heater

Engine coolant heater .......................................... 5-25Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (if soequipped) ............................................................... 4-3

HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver.............................. 2-31Hood, release ................................................................ 3-9Horn ............................................................................ 2-22How to stop alarm, Theft warning.............................. 2-16

I

Indicator lights and chimes (See warning/indicatorlights and chimes) ...................................................... 2-11Infiniti Communicator ................................................. 2-36Infiniti Communicator, False activation...................... 2-47Infiniti Communicator, Indicator light description ..... 2-43Infiniti Communicator, Outline ................................... 2-36Infiniti Communicator, Password ............................... 2-47Infiniti Communicator, Payment for use .................... 2-45Infiniti Communicator, Purpose.................................. 2-36Infiniti Communicator, Quick summary...................... 2-37

INDEX

11-3

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 275: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Infiniti Communicator, Safe operatingrecommendation.......................................................... 2-37Infiniti Communicator, System description ................ 2-40Infiniti Communicator, System function..................... 2-38Infiniti Communicator, System limitation................... 2-45Inside

Automatic anti-dazzling mirror............................. 3-13Mirror ................................................................... 3-13

Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ............................ 10-38Instrument panel ........................................................... 2-2Interior and cargo light............................................... 2-30Integrated HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver............. 2-31Interior light ................................................................ 2-30Interior light replacement............................................ 8-26

J

Jump starting ................................................................ 6-7

K

Keyless entry, (See multi-remote control system) ....... 3-4Keys .............................................................................. 3-2

L

Label, Air conditioner specification label ................. 10-29Label, Emission control information label ............... 10-29Label, F.M.V.S.S. certification label ......................... 10-28Labels

Air bag warning labels......................................... 1-19Air conditioner specification label ......................... 4-3Engine serial number......................................... 10-28Vehicle identification nubmer (VIN)................... 10-27

Lamp replacement....................................................... 8-24License plate, Installing front license plate.............. 10-30Light

Air bag warning light........................................... 1-19Bulb replacement ................................................. 8-24Cornering light ..................................................... 2-21Fog light switch ................................................... 2-21Headlamps (Bulb replacement)............................ 8-25Headlight switch................................................... 2-18Headlights (Bulb replacement)............................. 8-25Infiniti Communicator indicator ........................... 2-43Interior and cargo light........................................ 2-30Interior light ......................................................... 2-30Personal light ....................................................... 2-31Trunk light............................................................ 2-31

Vanity mirror lights.............................................. 2-31Warning/indicator lights and chimes........... 2-8, 2-11

Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement........... 8-26Loading information (See vehicle loadinginformation)............................................................... 10-30Lock

Door locks.............................................................. 3-3Glove box lock..................................................... 2-27Power door lock..................................................... 3-3Trunk lid lock opener lever ................................... 3-9

Low fuel warning light................................................ 2-10

M

MaintenanceBattery .................................................................. 8-13Explanation of maintenance items ............... 9-3, 9-11General maintenance...................................... 9-2, 9-3Inside the vehicle........................................... 9-2, 9-3Maintenance precautions ....................................... 8-2Outside the vehicle ........................................ 9-2, 9-3Periodic maintenance schedules............................ 9-6Seat belt maintenance.......................................... 1-31Under the hood and vehicle .................................. 9-5

Meters and gauges ....................................................... 2-4

INDEX

11-4

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 276: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

MirrorAutomatic anti-dazzling inside mirror.................. 3-13Inside mirror ........................................................ 3-13Outside mirror...................................................... 3-14Outside mirror control ......................................... 3-14Outside mirrors .................................................... 3-14

Multi-remote control system ........................................ 3-4

N

New vehicle break-in .................................................. 5-17

O

Odometer....................................................................... 2-5Oil

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants.... 10-19Changing engine oil .............................................. 8-8Changing engine oil filter ...................................... 8-9Checking engine oil level ...................................... 8-7Engine oil ............................................................... 8-7Engine oil viscosity............................................ 10-23

Outside mirror............................................................. 3-14Outside mirror control ................................................ 3-14Outside mirrors ........................................................... 3-14

Overdrive switch ......................................................... 5-11Overheat, If your vehicle overheats ............................ 6-10

P

Paint, Information ..................................................... 10-18Parking

Brake check.......................................................... 8-20Parking brake check............................................. 5-13Parking brake operation....................................... 5-13Parking/parking on hills ...................................... 5-13

Parking/parking on hills ............................................. 5-18Password, Infiniti Communicator ............................... 2-47Periodic maintenance schedules .................................. 9-6Personal light.............................................................. 2-31Power

Front seat adjustment ............................................ 1-3Power door lock..................................................... 3-3Power steering fluid............................................. 8-12Power steering system......................................... 5-19Power windows .................................................... 2-27

Pre-tensioner seat belt system ................................... 1-17Precautions

Cruise control precautions................................... 5-15Maintenance precautions ....................................... 8-2

On child restraints ............................................... 1-31On seat belt usage............................................... 1-21On supplemental restraint system ......................... 1-6

Push starting............................................................... 6-10

R

RadioAM-FM radio with cassette player ........................ 4-6AM-FM radio with cassette player andcompact disc player............................................... 4-6AM-FM radio with compact disc player................ 4-6Cassette player operation....................................... 4-6CB radio or car phone................................. 4-6, 4-17Compact disc (CD) player operation..................... 4-6

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test(USA only) ................................................................ 10-38Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock ................ 3-4Rear window and outside mirror defogger switch ..... 2-18Registering your vehicle in another country ............ 10-27Remote keyless entry, (See multi-remote controlsystem).......................................................................... 3-4Reporting safety defects (USA only) ........................ 10-37Roadside assistance program....................................... 6-2

INDEX

11-5

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 277: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

S

SafetyChild seat belts.................................................... 1-25Infiniti Communicator operating .......................... 2-37Reporting safety defects (USA only).................. 10-37Towing safety ..................................................... 10-33

Seat adjustment, Front power seat adjustment ............ 1-3Seat belt extenders ..................................................... 1-30Seat belt maintenance................................................. 1-31Seat belt warning light ............................................... 1-21Seat belt warning light and chime ............................... 2-8Seat belt(s)

Child safety .......................................................... 1-25Infants and small children ................................... 1-26Injured persons .................................................... 1-26Larger children..................................................... 1-26Pre-tensioner seat belt system ............................ 1-17Precautions on seat belt usage ........................... 1-21Pregnant women .................................................. 1-26Seat belt cleaning .................................................. 7-5Seat belts ............................................................. 1-21Three-point type with retractor ............................ 1-27

Seat(s)Heated seats......................................................... 2-22

Seats....................................................................... 1-2Security system (See theft warning)........................... 2-14Security system (Infiniti Vehicle Immoiliser System),Engine start ................................................................... 5-7Servicing air conditioner ...................................... 4-3, 4-6Shifting

Automatic transmission.......................................... 5-8Manual transmission............................................ 5-12

Shoulder belt height adjustment, For front seats ...... 1-30Side air bag system (See supplemental side air bagsystem)........................................................................ 1-15Spark plugs................................................................. 8-15Speedometer ................................................................. 2-5Starting

Before starting the engine...................................... 5-7Jump starting ......................................................... 6-7Push starting........................................................ 6-10Starting the engine................................................. 5-7

SteeringPower steering fluid............................................. 8-12Power steering system......................................... 5-19Steering switch for cellular phone....................... 2-48Tilting steering wheel........................................... 3-12

Storage ........................................................................ 2-24Sun shade ................................................................... 2-29

Sunroof, Automatic sunroof........................................ 2-29Supplemental air bag system ..................................... 1-13Supplemental air bag warning labels ......................... 1-19Supplemental air bag warning light ................... 1-19, 2-9Supplemental restraint system...................................... 1-6

Precautions on supplemental restraint system...... 1-6Supplemental side air bag system ............................. 1-15Switch

Cellular phone, steering....................................... 2-48Fog light switch ................................................... 2-21Hazard warning flasher switch............................. 2-21Headlight switch................................................... 2-18Overdrive switch................................................... 5-11Rear window and outside mirror defoggerswitch ................................................................... 2-18Traction control system cancel switch ................ 2-23Turn signal switch ............................................... 2-20

T

Tachometer.................................................................... 2-5Temperature gauge, Engine coolant temperaturegauge ............................................................................ 2-5Theft warning .............................................................. 2-14

INDEX

11-6

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 278: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Theft (Infiniti Vehicle Immobiliser System), Enginestart ............................................................................... 5-7Tilting steering wheel ................................................. 3-12Tire

Flat tire ................................................................... 6-2Spare tire.............................................................. 8-36Tire chains ........................................................... 8-33Tire placard ........................................................ 10-29Tire pressure ........................................................ 8-31Tire rotation.......................................................... 8-34Type of tires......................................................... 8-32Uniform tire quality grading .............................. 10-36wheel/tire size .................................................... 10-26Wheels and tires .................................................. 8-31

Top tether strap child restraints ................................. 1-39Towing

Tow truck towing ................................................. 6-12Towing a trailer .................................................. 10-32Towing load/specification chart ......................... 10-32Towing safety ..................................................... 10-33

Traction control system .............................................. 5-22Traction control system (TCS) cancel switch ............ 2-23Trailer towing ............................................................ 10-32Transmission

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)..................... 8-10

Driving with automatic transmission ..................... 5-8Driving with manual transmission....................... 5-12

TranceiverIntegrated HomeLinkT Universal ......................... 2-31

Transmitter, (See multi-remote control system)........... 3-4Traveling or registering your vehicle in anothercountry ...................................................................... 10-27Trunk lid lock opener lever .......................................... 3-9Trunk light .................................................................. 2-31Turn signal switch ...................................................... 2-20

U

Underbody cleaning ...................................................... 7-3Uniform tire quality grading ..................................... 10-36

V

Vanity mirror lights..................................................... 2-31Vehicle

Dimensions and weights.................................... 10-26Identification number (VIN)................................ 10-27Loading information........................................... 10-30Major vehicle systems and how they work......... 10-2Recovery, (freeing a stuck vehicle)7.................... 6-14

Ventilators ..................................................................... 4-2

W

WarningHazard warning flasher switch............................. 2-21Theft warning ....................................................... 2-14

Warning labels, Air bag warning labels..................... 1-19Warning light

Air bag warning light................................... 1-19, 2-9Brake warning light................................................ 2-9Door ajar ................................................................ 2-8Low fuel warning light......................................... 2-10Seat belt warning light and chime ........................ 2-8

Warning/indicator lights and chimes ........................... 2-8Warranty, Emission control system warranty ........... 10-37Washer switch, Windshield wiper andwasher switch ............................................................. 2-17Washing ........................................................................ 7-2Waxing .......................................................................... 7-3Weights (See dimensions and weights) ................... 10-26Wheel/tire size .......................................................... 10-26Wheels and tires ......................................................... 8-31Window washer fluid .................................................. 8-13

INDEX

11-7

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 279: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

Window(s)Cleaning ................................................................. 7-3Power windows .................................................... 2-27

Windshield wiper and washer switch......................... 2-17Wiper

Blades................................................................... 8-18Windshield wiper and washer switch .................. 2-17

INDEX

11-8

Z 98.10.22/’98 CA32-D X

Page 280: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

GAS STATION INFORMATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:Unleaded premium gasoline with an oc-tane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-KnockIndex) number (Research octane num-ber 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not avail-able, unleaded regular gasoline with anoctane rating of at least 87 AKI (Researchoctane number 91) can be used.

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-mance, the use of unleaded premiumgasoline is recommended.

CAUTION

Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol devices and systems, andcould also affect the warranty cover-age.

Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, since thiswill damage the three way catalyst.

For additional information, see ‘‘Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants’’ in the ‘‘10.Technical and consumer information’’ section.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDA-TION:O API Certification Mark

O API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving II orAPI grade SJ, Energy Conserving

O ILSAC grade GF-II

O SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for allambient temperatures.

See ‘‘Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants’’ in the ‘‘10. Technical and consumerinformation’’ section for engine oil and oil filterrecommendation.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:See tire placard affixed to the center consolelid.

Z 98.10.22/ X

Page 281: 1999 Infiniti I30 Owner's Manual

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PRO-CEDURES RECOMMENDATION:During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) ofvehicle use, follow the recommendations out-lined in the ‘‘Break-in schedule’’ Informationfound in the ‘‘5. Starting and driving’’ section ofthis Owner’s Manual. Follow these recommen-dations for the future reliability and economy ofyour new vehicle. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in vehicle dam-age or shortened engine life.

Hood release 3-9

Meters and gauges 2-4

Seat 1-2Trunk release 3-9

Seat belt 1-21

Key 3-2

Fuel 3-11, 10-19Spare tire 6-3, 8-36

Heater and air conditioner 4-3Audio system 4-6

Engine oil 8-7

Engine coolant 8-5

Windshield washer fluid 8-13

SIT0082

Z 98.10.22/ X